Download Telecine STE-B1 - BroadcastStore.com

Telecine STE-B1
Customer‘s Manual
Published by
BTS Media Solutions GmbH
Brunnenweg 9
D-64331 Weiterstadt, Germany
P.O. Box 1165
Tel: +49 (0) 6155-870-0
Fax: +49 (0) 6155-870-300
Web Sites
Internet:
Intranet:
www.thomsonbroadcast.com
www.imagingsystems.de
www.weiterstadt.thmulti.com
Trademarks
All product names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyrights
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot be reproduced, neither
communicated to a third party, without written authorization from THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions.
Please notify THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions of any errors in this document. We also would appreciate any comments
you have to improve this manual.
BTS Media Solutions GmbH 2002. All rights reserved.
Telecine STE-B1
Planning & Installation
Published by
BTS Media Solutions GmbH
Brunnenweg 9
D-64331 Weiterstadt, Germany
P.O. Box 1165
Tel: +49 (0) 6155-870-0
Fax: +49 (0) 6155-870-300
Web Sites
Internet:
Intranet:
www.thomsonbroadcast.com
www.imagingsystems.de
www.weiterstadt.thmulti.com
Trademarks
All product names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyrights
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot be reproduced, neither
communicated to a third party, without written authorization from THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions.
Please notify THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions of any errors in this document. We also would appreciate any comments
you have to improve this manual.
BTS Media Solutions GmbH 2002. All rights reserved.
Revision Report
Telecine STE-B1
Customer’s Manual
Documentation Order Number
FU 0065, 000 126 626 500
Before reading the entire
manual, please check for any
supplements at the end
of the manual.
Item
Rev
Date
Serial
No
Pages
affected
1
0
12.1999
100
all sections
2
1
05.2000
100
all sections
3
2
04.2002
100
all sections
Volume/Contents
Remarks
Planning and Install.
Operating Instructions
Planning and Install.
Operating Instructions
Planning and Install.
Operating Instructions
1st Edition
Preliminary (Beta Test)
Shipment release
2nd Revision
Operating Software V2.47
Plus:
Customer’s Manual
Graphical Control Panel
Operating Software V1.7.10
STE-B1
Safety Instructions
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Caution!
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any installation other
than that contained in the Planning and Installation Manual unless you are
qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Attention!
The film scanner unit has to be unpacked and lifted up by authorized forwarding agencies only, with appropriate lifting tool under control and instruction
of Thomson service personnel!
Danger of injury when the film scanner being lifted to the upright position!
Danger of fire!
Mount the Shadow Telecine STE-B1 on concrete or other non combustible
surface only.
Application
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
Eye safe
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is designed for application in TV studios and production facilities only. For safety reasons, any application for purposes other than
the original intended is not allowed.
Safety instructions concerning FH 6335 Serial HiPPI Interface (Rack 3):
The laser transceiver, used in this unit, is classified as AEL Class 1 (U.S. 21
CFR(J) and /AEL Class 1 per EN 60825-1 (+A11) and is eye safe.
Product complies with DHHS
Rule 21 CFR Subchapter J in
effect at date of manufacture
U® L
LISTED
PROFESSIONAL VIDEO EQUIPMENT
3S13
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is designed accordingly to regulations of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc.  Northbrook, Illinois US, certificated and registered
under file no. E184475
Conform with the following European directives and CE marked:
Low voltage directive
73/23/EEC
Safety standard
EN 60950 / 1997
EMC/EMI
89/336/EEC
Interference emission
EN 55103-1 / 1996
Interference immunity
EN 55103-2 / 1996
EMC
AS/NZS 3548
FCC
FCC 47 Part 15 Class A
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
I
Safety Instructions
FCC Rules
47 Part 15 Sec 15.105
Nitrate film material
STE-B1
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to the part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
The Shadow Telecine is not designed for running nitrate film material.
Thomson is not responsible for possible damage to the film material as well as for any
subsequent damage resulting therefrom.
Nitrate-base film material can be destroyed through electrostatic effects or when the internal
heat filter is damaged.
Risk of injury
When the Telecine is running, always keep the front doors closed, do not touch the
rotating film deck parts.
The closed front doors protect against fluttering film ends in the event of a film break.
Access to the
inside
Access to the inside of the Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is restricted by locked front
and rear doors. The closed doors protect operator against electrical and mechanical hazards.
Before working on the power supply circuit (power clips, wires, filters, switches,
fuses etc.) disconnect the unit from mains. Even if the mains switch is ”OFF”, parts
of the unit are still alive!
If, however, working on the opened machine is inevitable, this has only to be done
by an expert who is familiar with the dangers involved.
Caution!
Capacitors may still carry a residual charge for 4 minutes after having
switched off the unit!
II
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Safety Instructions
Attention!
Electrostatic sensitive devices on the p.c. board. Observe the following precaution
instructions for handling:
Earthing connector
D Never remove or insert p.c. boards when the Telecine is switched on.
D Install or remove p.c. boards from the Shadow Telecine with the corresponding
equipment only. Prior to withdrawing the p.c. board from the bag, apply an earthed
wristlet (e.g. 3M Wristlet Serial 2200).
D The Shadow Telecine cabinet is provided with a special earth connector at the front
and rear side.
D Use antistatical protective bags when carrying the p.c. boards.
Safety
Regulations
EN / VDE
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is designed in conformity with the safety regulations EN 60590 / VDE 0805 (protection class 1) and is in a faultless condition when
leaving the factory. In order to maintain this condition and to ensure a safe operation, the following directions have to be observed:
When setting up and connecting the Shadow Telecine STE-B1, connect the earth
line always before connecting the power line. Thus is ensured that in case of a
short-circuit between mains and case, the current is led to earth.
For this reason, never disconnect the earth line from the device while it is connected to mains. Details see chapter 4.13.3 “Earthing Requirements” in the
Customer Manual Planning and Installation.
Fuses
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is protected by primary-side fuses located on the
power terminal unit.
Caution!
To reduce the risk of fire replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.
Never use a mended fuse! Do not short-circuit the fuse holder!
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
III
Safety Instructions
STE-B1
Caution!
The rear service AC Out socket is a double-pole or neutral fusing.
After operation of the protective device, one line can remain under voltage!
Mains voltage
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is set to operate at the mains voltage stated on the
lable on the machine rear.
Prior the installation of the machine, make sure that the mains voltage in the studio
is identical to the voltage stated on this label. Details see chapter 4.13 Mains connection” in the Customer Manual Planning and Installation.
Ventilation
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is cooled by a ventilation system. The ventilating
air stream enters through openings in the bottom frame of the cabinets. The outgoing air leaves the cabinets on top. For this reason, make sure that the air inlets are
not covered when setting up and that sufficient space is maintained to the other
units. For cooling reasons always keep the doors closed during operation.
The admissible ambient temperature of the Telecine must not exceed or fall below
the range of +10o C (50o F) and +35o C (95o F).
Optimum operation is at temperature of +20 o C.
Make sure that the machine is protected against high humidity!
Make sure that enough space is provided so that the cabinets are easily accessible
for operation and service works.
During operation
Operate the Shadow Telecine STE-B1 in closed condition only.
To avoid EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problems keep the lower front
and rear doors always closed during operation!
Opening the covers or removing parts with tools may give access to live parts. In
such cases, the machine has to be disconnected from the mains.
If, for example due to a failure, safe operation of the Shadow Telecine STE-B1 is
no longer ensured, take the machine out of operation and secure it against further
use.
Service
Attention!
Do not insert or remove plug-in cards during power on.
Ptojection Lamp
Attention:
Switch off the Shadow telecine before cleaning the light path, and allow it to
cool down for 30 minutes (risk of getting burnt in the proximity of the halogen
projection lamp!).
IV
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Safety Instructions
Touch Screen
of GCP
Do not use pointed, sharp edged or metallic implements as a stylus,
they may damage the sensitive touch screen!
Use only the Thomson stylus, order no. 1 128 651 046.
Batteries
The device contains lithium batteries, which has to be exchanged every five years.
Detailed information you can find in the section Change the backup battery in the
operating instructions.
Caution!
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced (interchanged poles).
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
Protect the environment!
Dead batteries do not belong in the garbage. Hand the used batteries over
to a local disposal place!
Connection cables
The EMC regulations are only applicable when correctly shielded cables are used
for installation of the equipment. This applies to video cables as well as control
cables. Corresponding cables can be obtained from Thomson.
Run all connection cables in covered cable ducts (risk of stumbling).
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
V
Safety Instructions
VI
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Contents
CONTENTS
Page
1.
2.
General
1.1
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3
Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
1.4.14
1.4.15
1.4.16
Features and Special Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
GCP - Graphical Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Lens Gate Assembly and Gate Block Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Audio Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
FH 4067 - Image Rotation Ooption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
FH 4069 - HDTV Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
FH 4066 - Digital TV Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
TE 4101 - Phantom Transfer Engine Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
6SC - 6 Sector Color Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
FH 1639 - Vistavision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
SGR 2000 - SCREAM Grain Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
FH 4602 S8 mm Film Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
FH 4032 - One Phase Power Terminal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
FH 4033 - Two Phase Power Terminal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5
1.5.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Operational Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Specifications
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mains Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
Film Transport System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Illumination & Film Scanning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Light Source and Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
CCD Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.5
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.6
Waveform Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
Input / Output Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Audio (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
I
Contents
3.
II
STE-B1
2.7.3
Waveform Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
HDTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Option DTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Option Vistavision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
6-Sector Color Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
System Applications
3.1
SDTV Film to Tape Application / Pandora “Pogle”
and Noise Reducer VS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2
SDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / Pandora “Pogle”,
Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3
SDTV Film to Tape Application / DaVinci “Renaissance”
and Noise Reducer VS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.4
SDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / DaVinci “Renaissance”,
Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.5
SDTV Film to Tape Application / DaVinci “2K”
and Noise Reducer VS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6
SDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / DaVinci “2K”,
Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.7
HDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / DaVinci “2K”,
Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.8
Waveform Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.9
3.9.1
3.9.2
Keycode Applications EVERTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Keycode in SDTV, LTC-Out and VITC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Keycode in Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
Keycode Applications AATON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Keycode in SDTV, LTC-Out and VITC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Keycode in Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.11
3.11.1
Keycode Applications ARRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Keycode in Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.
Contents
Installation
4.1
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3
Instructions for Authorized Forwarding Agencies Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.5
Space Requirements and Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.6
Removal of Styrofoam Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.7
Installing Local Control Panel FH 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.8
Installing Handles at the Filmdeck Front Doors
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.1.1
4.9.1.2
4.9.2
4.9.2.1
4.9.2.2
4.9.3
Installing Graphical Control Panel GCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Desk Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Fixed Desk Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Desk Mounting with Swivel Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Fixed Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Rack Mounting with Swivel Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Connecting to the Shadow Telecine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.10
Connecting to an External Gateblast Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.11
4.11.1
4.11.2
Mounting Lenses and Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Insert Four Dichroic Filters into the Filter Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Insert Four Filter Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.12
Installing Lens Gate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.13
4.13.1
4.13.2
4.13.3
4.13.4
4.13.4.1
4.13.4.2
4.13.5
4.13.5.1
4.13.5.2
4.13.5.3
4.13.5.4
4.13.6
Mains Connection General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
General Remarks Concerning Commissioning and AC Power Supply . . . . 4-36
Earthing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Mains System (Power Types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Mains System from Europe and USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Mains System from USA and South-East (Asia, Japan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
An Easy Way to Find Out the Type of Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Edison System, 120/240V AC, Single-Phase, 3-Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Wye (Star) System, 120/208V AC or 230/398V AC, Three-Phase, 4-Wire . 4-44
Delta (Mesh) System, 240V AC or 398V AC, Three-Phase, 3-Wire . . . . . . . 4-45
Wild Leg (Crazy Leg) Delta System, 120/240V AC, Three-Phase, 4-Wire . 4-46
Required External Circuit Breaker and Cross Sections for
the Mains / Earth Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.14
4.14.1
4.14.2
4.14.3
4.14.4
Installing of the Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Location of Mains Terminal Unit FH 4030, FH 4032, FH 4033 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Three-Phase Power Terminal Unit FH 4030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Single-Phase Power Terminal Unit FH 4032, Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Two-Phase Power Terminal Unit FH 4033, Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
III
Contents
5.
IV
STE-B1
4.15
4.15.1
4.15.2
4.15.3
Mains Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Power Terminal Unit 1-Phase FH 4032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Power Terminal Unit 2-Phase FH 4033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Power Terminal Unit 3-Phase FH 4030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.16
4.16.1
4.16.2
Location of Power Supply Units of Rack 1 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Removal of Power Supply Units of Rack 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Removal of Power Supply Units of Rack 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Connections External Equipment
5.1
EMC Terminal Panel with Cable Feed-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2
Overview Rack 1 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
Connection Unit Audio Rack 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
Connection Unit Rack 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Keycode In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Color Frame Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Various Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
RJ45 iMCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Remote 4 – 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Waveform Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Pulses Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
5.5.9
5.5.10
5.5.11
Connection Unit Rack 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Analog Video Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Digital Video Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Sync Pulse Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
External Reference Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
iMCS 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
RS 232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Extern, Control Assy Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.6
iMCS Connections (RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5-5
5-6
5-8
5-9
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
6.
7.
Contents
Operational Controls
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
Audio Illumination-Film Preprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Equalizer FY 1101 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Output FY 1102 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Processor FY 1103 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Signal Control FY 4105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner Control Board FY 4106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner Pixel Format FY 4109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Clock Generator FY 4113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Signal Processing Board FY 4114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11
Film Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Film Clock Distribution FY 4201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Capstan & Sprocket Pulse Generator FY 6262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Filmdeck Control FY 4203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Fixed Pattern Noise FY 1206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Film Store FY 4205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Aperture Correction Format FY 4206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Film Color Correction Chrominance FY 6211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Bypass Secondary Color Correction FY 4229
6 Sector Color Correction FY 4209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Interface Board Demux FY 4210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Monitoring FY 1408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.8
6.3.9
6.3.10
6.3.11
Film Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Spatial Controller & Address FY 6301 / FM 6321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Effect Spatial Processing FY 6302 / FM 6320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Conversion Spatial Processing FY 6303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Genlock Generator FY 6338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Matrix & Contour Correction FY 6309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
TV Store FY 6310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
SDTV Output FY 6312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
HDTV Output Digital FY 6313 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
HDTV Output Analog FY 6314 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Data Output Interface FY 4345 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Spatial Processor Control FY 6346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Interfaces
7.1
RJ 45 / iMCS (Internal Machine Communication System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2
Remote Systems / RJ45 / iMCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3
Remote Control of Waveform Monitoring J3, J4 Rack 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4
Examples for the Connection to the Color Corrector
7.5
Description of Bi-Phase Signal, SOF Pulse and CFR OUT Pulse . . . . . . 7-6
7.6
7.6.1
Data Output Interface FY 4345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Pixel Assignment to the 32 bit HIPPI Data Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
V
Contents
8.
9.
VI
STE-B1
First Setup
8.1
Installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3
Basic Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4
Control of the Reference Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Basic Operation
9.1
Condition for Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
Reproduction Mode (PLAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1. General
1.
GENERAL
1.1
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual is part 1 of the Shadow STE-B1 Customer’s Manual.
This part of the manual contains all information required by the planning engineers
in the preparation of installation to include the Shadow Telecine in a studio or production environment. Furthermore, it contains all information required for setup, installation and initial startup.
All further information concerning control, maintenance and repair you will find in
the Operating Instructions and the Service Manual (in preparation) of the system.
1.2
INTRODUCTION
The Shadow Telecine is a professional digital multi standard telecine, based on
highly sophisticated CCD film scanning technology, for reproduction of color and
black/white films of the most different formats in highest picture quality.
Fig. 101: Shadow Telecine STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-1
1. General
STE-B1
The operating software serves to set the video parameters by means of the primary
color correction in extended ranges. The Shadow Telecine is prepared for various
useful options like Rotation, HDTV Output, Data Output via Phantom Transfer
Engine, 6/8 perf film mode Vistavision, S8 mm film scanning and a 6-Sector
Color Correction. These features make the telecine predestined for high end post
productions.
Extended flexibility provided by the options mentioned above gives the telecine a
lead in telecine technology.
1.3
CONFORMITY
U® L
C
U® L
E184475
This Shadow Telecine STE-B1 (three-phases 120/208V AC Power version) is designed accordingly to regulations of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc.  Northbrook, Illinois US, certificated in Nov. 1999 and registered as file no. E184475.
The STE-B1 telecine, operating on the mains voltage 120/208V AC, is constructed
in conformity with the American and Canadian UL standards and is marked with
an UL sign on its type label.
Conform with the following European directives and CE marked:
Low voltage directive
73/23/EEC
Safety standard
EN 60950 / 1997
EMC/EMI
89/336/EEC
Interference emission
EN 55 103-1 / 1996
Interference immunity
EN 55 103-2 / 1996
1-2
EMC
AS/NZS 3548
FCC
FCC 47 Part 15 Class A
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1.4
1. General
FEATURES AND SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS
Principle of
film scanning
A prism assembly splits up the line of the light scanning film onto the respective
color filters of the R, G and B line CCD sensor.
The impinging light is optoelectrically converted in pixel elements of the CCD line
sensor depending on the line content, then transferred in parallel to the analog
CCD shift register and read out horizontally.
Output
standards
The Shadow Telecine provides for reproduction of films in the 625/50 and
525/59.94 (4:3 / 16:9) SDTV standards and – as optional feature – in the various
HDTV and DTV standards (1280x720 / 1920x1080 - interlaced 2:1, progressive
1:1, segmented frame) or in DPX film data format. EDTV standards are prepared.
Standard selection is made in the main menu ”SETUP.”
Film types
COLOR PRINT (B/W positive, B/W negative, color positive), COLOR NEGATIVE,
INTERMEDIATE* and PRIMETIME films of all formats can be reproduced, which
have 1 (16 mm) 2, 3, 4 (35 mm) perforation holes per frame.
*
Intermediate film: a normal positive film with an orange colored mask, which is
also used in negative films.
The option “Vistavision” provides reproduction of 6 and 8 perf 35mm films.
Note:
Option Rotation is required.
Film formats
The telecine operates with S8 (option) 16 mm, Super 16mm, Academy 35mm and
Full Aperture -35 mm film formats. A simple switch over enables 4:3 as well as 16:9
reproduction.
Format change
Format change from 35 mm to other film formats without the need of adjustments,
simply by menu selection and exchanging the lens gate assembly.
Lens gate
assemblies
The Shadow Telecine can be equipped with the following lens gate assemblies
(also called LGA’s):
D Super 16mm lens gate assembly incl. 16 mm film gate for scanning super
16 mm and 16 mm films
D FA 35mm lens gate assembly (Full Aperture) incl. 35 mm film gate for scanning
super 35 mm and 35 mm films
Effect filters
Special effect filters can be positioned into the Lens Gate Assembly.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-3
1. General
Gateblast unit
STE-B1
An integrated gateblast unit, consisting of a pressure reducer, air filter and magnetic valve keeps the light gap of the film gate dustfree.
An external air compressor (approx. 2.5 - 7.5 bar or 35 -107 lb / sq. inch - air volume:
60 l / min. / oilfree operating) is required.
Attention!
The using of the gate blast unit is absolutely mandatory to keep the film gate
with illumination slit and integration cylinder clean from dust.
Sizing
The fully digitized sizing facility allows a distortion-free reproduction of different film
formats. Broadcast quality picture section enlargements and reductions are possible via the sizing adjustments.
Primary color
correction
Via stored matrix and mask settings, all positive, negative and interpositive films
are adapted to the telecine.
Color correction adjustments can be carried out individually or together in the black,
gray and white picture areas.
The chrominance saturation compensates color losses of the film being scanned.
Secondary color
correction
The Shadow is prepared for the option “6-Sector Color Correction”.
Aperture,
2D contour
correction
The horizontal and vertical contour and aperture enhancement of the telecine provides optimum sharpness.
The aperture correction is fixed with a flat response.
The contour correction is variable to increase or decrease sharpness.
Film reels or
winding plates
The film capacity of winding plates (Ø = 44 cm) amounts to 900 m and of film reels
(Ø = 54 cm) to 1200 m. In addition, film loop operation is possible.
Film transport
The film transport is continuously. The silent capstan drive is microcomputer-controlled and ensures gentle film handling.
Film transport
modes
There are two unlocked modes of film transport in forwards and reverse motion:
1. Single frame mode
2. Continuously adjustable search mode
with visible picture and full color picture size)
from slow motion (= 1/10 the normal speed)
up to 10x of the normal speed for 35mm film
up to 25x of the normal speed for 16mm film
Locked modes
Normal speeds are:
24 frames/s
25 frames/s
for 60 Hz TV standards
for 50 Hz TV standards
Fixed film transport speeds (forward and reverse):
with 50 Hz standard: 6 1/4, 12 1/2, 18 3/4 25 and 50 fps
and with 60 Hz standard: 6, 12, 18, 24, 30 and 48 fps
1-4
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1. General
Variable SAS (select a speed) film transport speeds forward and reverse:
are from 2 to 57 fps in steps of 1/1000 fps.
In addition, quick stop and a high-grade freeze frame are standard.
Auto
functions
The Shadow telecine has an automatic quick stop mode that responds to film
break and film run out.
The FPN (Fixed Pattern Noise) correction: includes the automatic shading compensation, the automatic white balance and the coarse POS/NEG matching.
Analog
video interface
Analog R G B or Y CB CR standard video interface (SDTV Output FY 6312) enables
connection to conventional video equipment.
Digital
video interface
The digital video interface (SDTV Output FY 6312) provides SDTV 4:2:2 output
signals conforming to EBU Tech. 3267-E and SMPTE 125 M interface format and
to the CCIR 601 and CCIR 656 standards.
D Digital Outputs:
- SDTV 4:2:2, 4:2:2:4 or 4x4 Parallel
- SDTV 4:2:2, 4:2:2:4 or 4x4 Serial
Distribution of EDTV and 8:4:4 signals via this interface is prepared.
Sepmag
Control Interface
This interface can be used to drive external SEPMAG units (e.g. Killi, Albrecht,
Sondor, Perfectone a.o.) lip-synchronously to the associated film.
Two bi-phase sync pulses determine the direction of tape motion of the external
SEPMAG unit.
These pulses are configurable to 1x (25/24 Hz) 2x (50/48 Hz) or 10x (250/240 Hz)
film speed.
Time code system
The telecine enables a clear identification of every frame at every PLAY speed.
Linear Time Code compatible to SMPTE standard 12M is provided at socket LTC
OUT Rack3.
Key code reader
systems
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 provides the use of AATON, Evertz and ARRI keycode reader heads.
Note!
Reader heads are not included.
Key code
embedded
in DPX data
The operating software applies to keycode data reproduction generated by a keycode reader from the manufacturers Evertz, AATON or ARRI.
Local Control
system
The Shadow telecine is supplied with a Local Control Panel which provides basic
operation of transport, framing, FPN, stand by, focus and local / remote functions.
The Functional Control Panel provides complete functional control of the telecine,
incl. setups. This panel controls the machine via the internal iMCS 1 interface.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-5
1. General
Remote control
interfaces
STE-B1
The remote control interface iMCS 1 serves also to remotely control the telecine
from external devices (e.g. Pogle Pandora, DaVinci Renaissance).
IMCS control interface:
The iMCS control interface (internal machine communication system) is designed
as a control connection between machine(s) and control panel(s) on Cheapernet
basis (IEEE 802.3 standard).
iMCS:
WF-monitoring
10Base-T / RJ45 connectors with internal HUB
IEEE 802.3
For Graphical Control Panel, Film Color Correctors and
Diagnostic PC with cheapernet interface board.
A monitoring selector allows to display a signal at several test points within the digital processing chain, for enhanced monitoring session and for test purposes.
Note!
Not included but required:
PTR rollers
1-6
Waveform monitor
The Particle Transfer Rollers used to clean the film during play on both sides of dirt,
dust and lint.
The rollers are performed as reverse helix particle transfer rollers. That means they
contain a Micro Mat helix side-wipe system for a powerful film cleaning.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1.4.1
1. General
GCP 1 GRAPHICAL CONTROL PANEL
The control panel GCP1 designed as graphical user interface allows all operational
functions to be controlled.
1.4.2
LENS GATE ASSEMBLY AND GATE BLOCK OPTIONS
D FA35 LGA - Full Aperture 35 mm Lens Gate Assembly
For scanning all types of 35 mm POS, NEG, IP and Primetime films.
Comprising:
- Film gate
- Image Lens
- Test film: Chess Board
D FG S16 LGA - Super 16 mm Lens Gate Assembly
For scanning all types of 16 mm POS, NEG, IP and Primetime films.
Comprising:
- Film gate
- Image Lens
- Test film: Chess Board
D FH 4602 Super 8 mm Film Gate (Option) for FG S16 LGA
For scanning all types of S8 mm films. In exchange with 16 mm film gate, which
is part of the FG S16 LGA.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-7
1. General
1.4.3
STE-B1
AUDIO OPTIONS
Audio formats
All usual audio tracks can be scanned
D 16 and 35mm comopt sound (COMOPT/mono)
D 16mm commag sound (COMMAG/mono)
D 35mm comopt sound (COMOPT/Dolby stereo, switchable to mono)
Test generator
Internal test tone generator (1kHz/10kHz)
Analog
audio interface
The analog audio interface of the telecine enables connection of mono or stereo
signals to conventional audio studios.
Analog outputs:
Digital
audio interface
- Audio 1 / 2
- Monitor L / R
- Headphone
The digital audio interface conforms to the AES/EBU standard.
The sound can be digitally delayed from the control panel.
Digital Output AES / EBU
D FH 1129 - Audio Scanner & Processor
Including:
- Audio Scanner 1 (Commag 16 mm / Mono)
- Audio Scanner 2 (Comopt 35 / 16)
- Audio Equalizer & Processor Boards
Mounting into Rack 1 and Filmdeck
D FY 1102 - Audio Output Transformer
For symmetrical and ground free analog outputs; galvanic isolated.
1.4.4
FH 4067 - IMAGE ROTATION OPTION / FH 4068 IMAGE ROTATION UPGRADE KIT
Allows to rotate the picture in a range of – 180o to + 180o
Including:
D FY 6301 Spatial Control & Address Generator
D FY 6302 Effect Spatial Processing 3x
Mounting in Rack 3
Note:
1-8
Required for option “Vistavision”
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1.4.5
1. General
FH 4069 - HDTV OUTPUT OPTION
The HDTV Output Option contains the p.c. boards
HDTV Output Digital FY 4313.xx and HDTV Output Analog FY 6314.xx and two
HDTV Serializer.
Allows to select the following HDTV standards:
D 1250/50 / 2:1
according to CCIR TG 11 or EU 95
D 1125/60 and 1125/59.94 / 2:1
according to SMPTE 260M
D 1920x1080/60 and 59.94 / 2:1
according to SMPTE 274M
Spatially upconverted from 1332 pixel optical resolution.
Analog RGB or YCR CB (BNC) and
digital parallel CCIR TG 11 (2x 50-pin subminiature D-connector) interface.
Containing boards for:
D Multi standard HD D/A converter (1x)
D HDTV digital output stage (1x)
1.4.6
FH 4066 - DIGITAL TV OPTION
The Option DTV, operating in the Shadow Telecine STE-B1, is designed to generate film images according to the digital TV standards ANSI / SMPTE 296 M.
D 1280x720 / 60 Hz progressive
D 1280x720 / 59.94 Hz progressive
D 1920x1080 / 25 Hz progressive
D 1920x1080 / 24 Hz progressive
D 1920x1080 / 23.98 Hz progressive
D 1920x1080 / 24 Hz segmented frames
D 1920x1080 / 23.98 Hz segmented frames
D 1920x1080 / 50 Hz 2:1 interlace
Note!
Option FH 4069 HDTV Output is required.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-9
1. General
1.4.7
STE-B1
TE 4101 - PHANTOM TRANSFER ENGINE PACKAGE 103, 0 128 407 010 (OPTION)
consisting of:
DS 0170
FY 4345.xx
FH 6335
FU 0077
Phantom TransferEngine SW (CD)
Data Output Interface (Rack 3)
HiPPI Serial Interface (Term.Panel R 3)
Customer‘s Manual Phantom TE
0 038 057 000
0 128 434 570
0 128 633 500
0 126 627 700
Introduction
The Phantom TransferEngine is a complementary product to the Spirit DataCine
film scanner, Shadow Telecine and the Specter Virtual DataCine, and includes integrated software applications and drivers developed to ensure efficient control
and maximum image data throughput during the scanning process.
The Phantom TransferEngine captures image data either from the HiPPI data
channel or from the HDTV channel:
D The HiPPI data channel can record DPX–formatted images from the Spirit
DataCine, Shadow Telecine and Specter Virtual DataCine HiPPI data output.
D The HDTV channel can read HDTV video from Spirit DataCine, Shadow Telecine, Specter Virtual DataCine and VooDoo Media Recorder. This feature is
supported by a Phantom TransferEngine running on a Specter Virtual DataCine only and requires appropriate optional hardware installed in the SGI
server.
The transferred image data can be displayed in various resolutions on the monitor,
stored onto a disk array with or without prior modification (e.g. change of format,
etc.) and written to tape for archive purposes.
Features
D Accepts data from Spirit DataCine, Shadow Telecine and Specter Virtual DataCine HiPPI output
D Accepts video from the Spirit DataCine, Shadow Telecine, Specter Virtual DataCine and VooDoo Media Recorder HDTV output
D Stores data on disk in DPX format (SMPTE 268M–1994)
D Displays Thumbnail pictures for confidence viewing
D Displays HiRes images on Data Monitor
D Remote control by Telecine Controller supported
D Data format export (Cineon, SGI, TIFF, JPEG, BMP, etc.)
D Graphical User Interface (GUI)
D Drivers for archiving devices
1-10
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1.4.8
1. General
6SC - 6 SECTOR COLOR PROCESSOR
Basic 6 sector color corrector for yellow, green, cyan, blue and magenta. It extends
the primary color corrector already supplied with Thomson telecine and works always in the highest possible resolution of the scanning system.
1.4.9
FH 1639 - VISTAVISION
Extends the 35mm scanning formats by
- 35mm 8 perf (Vistavision) film format
- 35mm 6 perf (Cinerama) film format
Note!
1.4.10
Option FH 4067 Image Rotation is required.
SGR 2000 - SCREAM GRAIN REDUCER
Resolution independent Grain Reducer contains a signal processing in RGB up to
2k in real time, use of the internal real time bus interface of Shadow and controlled
by the GCP or a TK controller.
Note!
1.4.11
Option FH 4067 Image Rotation is required.
FH 4602 S8 MM FILM SCANNING
See chapter 1.4.2 lens gate assembly and film gate options.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-11
1. General
1.4.12
STE-B1
ACCESSORIES
D FH 4020 Basic Accessories 0 128 402 000
Contents:
Toolbag with various standard and special tools, 10 pcs capstan lamp
Dustaway compressed air cleaner
D Customer‘s Manual FU 0065
(already supplied with the basic unit)
incl.:
Part 1: Planning & Installation
Part 2: Operation Manual
D FH 1660 Diagnostic Kit
Provides comprehensive diagnostic, service presets and remote access control of the Shadow Telecine via modem and software PC DUO.
Comprising:
- PC Software SDCMAINT DS 0153
- PC DUO software FH 1661 for remote access control
- PC LAN connection cable 10m FH 1667
Features:
D STE-B1 option control (views and enables additional software options)
D iMCS protocol recording and editing
D System messages recording, editing and weighting selection
D Software and board version indication
D Operating time for the Telecine, projection, capstan and audio lamps
D Continuous realtime board check for correct type, version, sync pulses,
RSCI control over temperature
D Store, analyze and reload system dumps
D Mini control panel
D Interactive system tests via script files
D Remote control access for Thomson service
1-12
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1. General
Hardware Requirements for SDCMAINT:
D Desktop PC with a CPU i486, Intel Pentium or compatible using Windows 3.x, 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, XP
D 3 ½” floppy disk drive
D CD ROM drive
D VGA graphics adapter with a minimum of 640x480 pixels and 16 colors
(recommended are 800x600 or 1024x768 pixels and 256 colors)
D 8 MB RAM
D Ethernet card (ISA, PCI, PCMCIA or Pocket Adapter) with a BNC connector (10base2) or 10Base-T / RJ45 connector.
D Modem for remote control access with PC DUO
1.4.13
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
D Air Exhaust Hood 2 128 500 010 (Option)
Exhaust hood with flanges for two 10 inches air hoses.
D FH 4425 Spare Lamp Socket 0 128 442 510 (Option)
Socket for halogen lamp
D Service Manual FU 0066
Comprehensive technical manual
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-13
1. General
STE-B1
D
Test films
35mm:
– TF 35-F4
FA 35mm test film, format, 4perf
1 015 630 067
– Checkerboard test 35mm (3 m)
1 131 900 332
– Grating test 35mm (3 m)
1 131 900 333
– Format film 35mm anamorphic (3 m)
2 015 630 056
– Format film 35mm academy (3 m)
2 015 630 054
– 5MHz focus distribution 35mm
2 131 900 163
– Dolby stereo COMOPT audio,
with pink noise 35mm
1 011 010 082
– Dolby stereo COMOPT audio,
signal level 35mm
1 011 010 083
Super 35mm:
– TF 35-HR
FA 35mm test film, HDTV resolution
1 015 630 070
– TF 35-F3
FA 35mm test film, format, 3perf
1 015 630 071
– TF 35-F2
FA 35mm test film, format, 2perf
1 015 630 072
16mm:
– Checkerboard test 16mm (2.8 m)
1 131 900 336
– Grating test 16mm (2.8 m)
1 131 900 337
– Format film 16mm (3 m)
2 015 630 051
– Format film 16mm anamorphic (3 m)
2 015 630 053
Super 16mm:
1.4.14
– TF 16-FS
S 16mm test film, format
1 015 630 073
– TF 16-HR
S 16mm test film, HDTV resolution
1 015 630 068
CONSUMABLES
D Halogen Lamp 2 128 102 130
Spare halogen lamp 250 W / 24 V (10 pcs) for film illumination
D Spare PTR roller set – 3 149 900 882
contains 4 rollers
1-14
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1.4.15
1. General
FH 4032 - ONE PHASE POWER TERMINAL UNIT
Alternative to the standard Three Phase Power Terminal FH 4030
Only for 230 V!
Can only be ordered with the initial order of the STE-B1!
1.4.16
FH 4033 - TWO PHASE POWER TERMINAL UNIT
Alternative to the standard Three Phase Power Terminal FH 4030
Only for 208 V!
Can only be ordered with the initial order of the STE-B1!
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-15
1. General
1-16
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1. General
1.5
OVERVIEW
1.5.1
Operational Units
12
STE -B1
Thomson
14
2
1
3
9
8
13
4
7
5
6
21 - 22
15 - 20
Options Rack 3
Option Rack 2
Fig. 102: Main modules and optional units in the Shadow Telecine STE-B1
The Shadow Telecine consists of the following main modules:
1. Film Preprocessing FH 4100 and optional Audio Processing (Rack 1)
2. Film Scanner FH 4400
3. Lens Gate Assembly (35 mm or 16 mm LGA)
4. Filmdeck FH 4000
5. Film Processing FH 4200 (Rack 2)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-17
1. General
STE-B1
6. Film Postprocessing FH 6380 (Rack 3)
including:
SDTV Analog Out
RGBSK
SDTV Digital Out
4:2:2
or Y CR CB S K
or 4:2:2:4
or 4x4
7. Local Control Panel
8. Keycode Reader Mounting Support
for AATON, EVERTZ and ARRI
9. Particle Transfer Rollers
10. Diagnosis Kit FH 1660 (see fig .103)
Diagnosis & maintenance tool “SDCMAINT” incl. remote access control via
PC DUO.
Not included but required: PC with Ethernet Interface and modem.
Hardware requirements for PC and Ethernet card see separate manual
SDCMAINT.
11. GCP1 Graphical Control Panel
See fig. 103.
Options
The following units are optionally available:
12. Air Exhaust Hood
13. Audio Pick-up and Processor Set FH 1129
mounted on the filmdeck
- Audio Scanner 1 FH 1013
- Audio Scanner 2 FH 1023
(Commag 16) and
(Comopt 35 / 16 mm)
and with following boards in rack1
- Audio Equalizer Board FY 1101
- Audio Processor FY 1103
14. Audio Output Transformer FY 1102
15. HDTV Processing FH 4069
including following boards in rack 3:
FY 6314.xx HDTV Output Analog
FY 4313.xx HDTV Output Digital
G B R S K or
Y CB CR S K
4:2:2 or 4:2:2:4 or 4x4
16. FY 4345.xx Data Output Interface board in rack 3
Part of FH 4101 Transfer Engine Package
1-18
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
1. General
17. FH 6335 HIPPI Serial Interface board in rack 3
provides a high speed data transmission via fibre optic cable
Part of FH 4101 Transfer Engine Package
18. Rotation FH 4067
including following boards in rack 3:
FY 6301.xx Spatial Controller and Address
3x FY 6302.xx Effect Spatial Processor
19. Digital TV FH 4066
including following boards in rack 3:
FY 6338.xx Genlock 1920x1080/P
20. Transfer Engine Package TE 4101
including the board FY 4345.xx Data Output Interface in rack 3,
the HiPPI Serial Interface for data transmission via fibre optic cable
and Transfer Engine software for high-speed film data to be fed to a computer
workstation.
21. 6 Sector Color Processor (6SC STE)
including following board in rack 2:
- FY 4209.xx Secondary Color Correction
22. S8 mm scanning
including following board in rack 2:
- FY 6262.xx Capstan Control and Sprocket Pulse Generator
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
1-19
1. General
STE-B1
For Shadow Telecine system configuration, the following units are
recommendable:
24
23
25
Diagnostic PC
with Ethernet Card
11
?
10
Fig. 103:
23. Waveform monitor - multistandard (e.g. Philips PT 5464 HD)
24. Active audio speaker (e.g. Fostex 6301B)
25. Video color monitor (e.g. Sony 2010 / SDTV or Barco HDM 2051/HDTV)
1-20
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2.
2. Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Note!
Specifications apply after a warm-up time period of 15 minutes.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
DEVICE CATEGORY
The Shadow Telecine is suitable for stationary
studio operation.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
UL
UL
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
2.1.2
ENVIRONMENT
Recommended
Air-conditioned or ventilated; dust-free room
Temperature
Operation:
Storage:
+10_C to 35_C
(50_F to 95_F)
with Lens Gate Assy
+10_C to 40_C
(50_F to 104_F)
without Lens Gate Assy
-10_C to 40_C
(14_F to 104_F)
Specifications apply after a warm-up period of 15
minutes
Rel. Humidity
Ventilation
Storage and operation without condensation
10% to 80%
Specifications apply to a range of
40% to 60%
The ventilating air stream enters through openings
in the bottom frame of the Shadow Telecine cabinet. The outgoing air leaves the cabinet on top.
Air filter mats protect against dust.
Required air quantity
At 20o C ingoing air temperature
Safety regulations
Electrical equipment
D Low voltage directives
Safety of information technology equipment
900 m3/h
(32 000 f3/h)
73/23/EEC
EN 60950
(VDE 805)
(IEC 950)
C
®
®
E184475
D Mechanical equipment
DIN 31000
D Standard for safety
UL 1419
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-1
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Interference emission
Interference immunity
Electromagnetic environment E2 and E4
EN 55 103-1
Electromagnetic emission:
– emission radiated
– emission contacted
EN 550 22 class B
EN 550 22 class B
Electromagnetic environment E2 and E4
EN 55 103-2
–
Electromagnetic immunity
EN 61000-4-3
–
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
– Electrical fast transient (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
– Surge immunity test
EN 61000-4-5
– Immunity to conducted disturbances
EN 61000-4-6
– Voltage dips
EN 61000-4–11
Comment:
According to the valuation criterion B, test pulses in conformity with standard
EN 55 103-2 may cause minor picture interferences at the analog SDTV output. In addition, disturbances in synchronism may occur at the outputs Sync
Out (J37), SDTV Sync Out (J 40), Pulldown Out (J17) and FRS Out (J18).
After decay of test pulses, there will be no impairment of operation.
Attention!
Conformity to the EMC regulations is only assured with closed
Shadow Telecine rear doors during operation.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
EMC
AS / NZS 3548
Australian C-Tick-label
FCC
47 Part 15 Sec 15.105
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Noise Emission
2-2
weighted according to DIN 45635 Part 1
Typical 60 dB (A)
In Play and Standby
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.1.3
MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS
Shadow Telecine cabinet
Transport crate
2.1.4
Width:
1265 mm (49.80 inch)
Height:
1942 mm (76.45 inch)
Depth:
906 mm (35.67 inch)
Weight:
approx. 460 kg (1015 lbs)
Ground load
400 kp/m2 (82 lbs/sq.ft.)
Peak area load
<12.5 kp/cm2
(<178 lbs/sq.in)
Width
2120 mm (83.46 in)
Height
1050 mm (41.33 in)
Depth
1550 mm (61.02 in)
Weight
approx. 150 kg (331 lbs)
MAINS CONNECTION
Mains supply
3-phase current (UL approved)
K-type fuse required
or
3-phase current (not UL approved)
or optional:
1-phase current (not UL approved)
2-phase current (UL approved)
K-type fuse required
3 x 400 V, 60 Hz
3 x 400 V, 60 Hz
1 x 230 V, 50 Hz
2 x 208 V, 60 Hz
Note for Japan!
3-phase current 3 x 175V, 60 Hz not supported.
Use 3-phase current 3 x 350 V, 60 Hz!
Power Consumption
Typically
approx. 5 kVA
3 Phases 400V= 5.5A / 6.5A / 9.5A
3 Phases 208V = 11A / 13A / 19A
2 Phases 208V = 22A
1 Phase 230V = 20A
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-3
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
2.2
FILM TRANSPORT SYSTEM
Film size format
D 16mm
D S16mm
D FA (Super) 35 mm
D 35 mm in 4 perf, 3 perf and 2 perf
D Vistavision 35 mm in 8 perf (Option)
D Cinerama 35 mm in 6 perf (Option)
D S8 mm (Option)
Film types
D Color Print
B/W positive; B/W negative; Color positive
D Color Negative
D Intermediate
D Primetime
Film transport
D Direct servo controlled capstan drive
D Feed and take up spooling servo controlled to provide constant film tension
Fixed speeds
Full resolution in forward and reverse mode
25, 12 1/2, 6 1/4 18 3/4 fps
at 625 lines / 50 Hz
29.97, 23.98, 17.98, 11.99, 5.99 fps
at 525 lines / 59.94 Hz
Reduced vertical resolution in forward and
reverse mode
57 fps
all standards
Select-A-Speed
D 2.00 to 57.00 fps in forward and reverse
Stop mode
D Frame accurate in full quality
D Spatial and color processing still possible
Variable visible search
With full size picture in a range of
2 fps to at least 150 fps
for 16 mm
2 fps to at least 75 fps
for 35 mm
Upper limit adjustable to 600 fps for 16 mm
and 240 fps for 35 mm
Step mode
2-4
Single step forward and reverse with full resolution
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Run-up time
to 25 or 24 fps
D Unlocked but correct speed
< 0,2 s
D Locked to correct speed within
1,8 s
Picture stability
35mm-4 Perf
Better than
" 0.06 %
of full frame height / width for 35mm 4 Perf
16mm
Better than
" 0.10 %
of full frame height /width for 16mm film
Framing adjustment
- 60 % ... + 60 % of total frame height
Film capacity
on spools :
on cores :
Capacity with 16mm and 35 mm DIN or ANSI
spools
(diameter 54 cm / 2.1”),
Up to
1200m
(3937 ft)
Capacity with DIN- or ANSI- cores
(diameter < 44 cm / 1.7”)
Up to
900 m
(2952 ft)
A/B wind
Switch for clockwise and counterclockwise winding
Film Switch
Stops film in shuttle before running from the spool /
core
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-5
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
2.3
ILLUMINATION AND FILM SCANNING SYSTEM
2.3.1
LIGHT SOURCE AND CONDENSER
Halogen lamp
D 250W Halogen lamp, long live type!
D Elapsed time meter
Optical matching filters
D Selectable filters for
PRINT, NEG, INTERMED and “PRIMETIME”
Grey scale disc
D Adjustment of illumination level
Film Gate
D Air supported Film Gate with skid plate for
smooth film handling
D with FA 35mm gateblock or S 16 mm gateblock
2.3.2
CCD SCANNER
Lens / Gate Assemblies
(LGA)
Two different Lens / Gate Assemblies are possible,
each consisting of projections lens and film gate.
The two different types of Lens / Gate Assemblies
available are:
D Full Aperture 35 mm Lens / Gate Assembly,
achromatic color correction
D Super 16 mm Lens / Gate Assembly, achromatic color correction
Film gate
D Interchangeable with automatic detection
D Fast lock for easy cleaning
D FA 35mm LGA may be equipped with a 35mm
gate block
D S 16 mm LGA may be equipped with a 16mm
gate block or optional with a S8 mm gate block
Gate blast
- mandatory
D Connector and hose provided for externally
Focus control
D Remote mechanical focus control for adjust-
supplied compressed air to keep gate clean
from dust.
ment
2-6
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Beam Splitter
D Dichroic beam splitter with R, G, B color filters
on the output
Pickup device
D Three Linear CCD Sensors
Preamplifier & ADC
D Correlated double Sampling
X-Y Zoom
D switchable gain
0 dB / + 6 dB
D Typical area magnification for SDTV
0.1 x to 10.5 x
D Independent X and Y sizing possible
D X - Y panning and repositioning
D Anamorphic unsqueeze 2:1
Geometry and linearity
Better than
0.5%
of picture height
White Shading
Automatic compensated
<"2%
( γ = 0.4)
Fixed Pattern Noise (FPN)
Automatic compensation for pixel nonuniformity
errors
< 0.5%
of peak white
with γ = 0.4
Aperture
Correction
D H and V inband in relation to film, fixed
Contour
Correction
D H and V, TV - related
D > -12 dB....+12 dB at max. peaking frequency
D Peak frequency adjustable
D Coring adjustable
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-7
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.4
VIDEO
TV standards
625/50, 525/59.94
4:4:4:4 or 4:2:2:4
or 8:4:4
2:1 interlace
Display formats
4:3 and 16:9 full screen
and horizontal / vertical letterbox
Masking
D Choice of preset masking equations for different
CCIR 601
CCIR 656
film stocks
D Linear (MATRIX) or logarithmic (MASKING)
depending on selected film stock
System timing
adjustable
Vertical:
Horizontal:
Signal / Noise ratio
Measured at 50% video level, gamma = 0.4,
The ratio being 700mV divided by r.m.s. noise
voltage
for
1 frame
1 TV line
luminance
red
green
blue
> 58 dB
> 55 dB
> 55 dB
> 55 dB
Digital color correction
MATCHING
RGB-Gain
RGB-Black
BLACK
MASTER
RGB
WHITE
MASTER
RGB
Gamma
MASTER
RGB
Extended
Ranges
CR-Saturation
2-8
CRT
1.00 / 0.45
Lift Master
Lift RGB
–100% +100%
–100% +100%
Gain Master
Gain RGB
0% - 1000%
0% - 200%
Gamma Master
Gamma RGB
0 - 2.5
" 60%
of Master Range
Continuous variable adjustable
0% .... 200%
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Digital Blanking
D Control of size, H- and V-position
D Adjustable full frame horizontal / vertical
D Fixed wide screen blanking
Effect Filter Kit
D Clear supermist filters: 0.25, 0.5, 1.00, 2.00,
3.00 and optical flat (clear)
D Black supermist filters: 0.25, 0.5, 1.00, 2.00,
3.00
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-9
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.5
CONTROL SYSTEM
Basic Local Control
Implemented in the Telecine cabinet.
Offering basic functions to load the film such
as:
STAND BY ON/OFF
FPN correction
A/B wind
FRAMING
PLAY FWD/REV
STEP FWD/REV
STOP
SHUTTLE FWD/REV
LOCAL/REMOTE
POWER ON/OFF
FOCUS
GCP1
Graphical Control Panel
Full operating and service control of all functions, to be mounted separate from the
Shadow Telecine
Dimension:
Height 5 Rack Units
223 mm (8.78 in)
Telecine Controller
Interface e.g. to a Pandora or DaVinci telecine
controller / programmer / editor (standard operation control)
2-10
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.6
WAVEFORM MONITORING
Application
D Color Grading in RGB
D Focus adjustment
D Video path checking
(except MTF measurements)
Features
D Monitoring of the color signals inside the
digital signal processing and at the outputs.
D Single, parade or superimposed display
Waveform
monitors
supported monitors for interfacing:
D Philips PT 5464 HD
D TEK 1735 / 1730 HD
D TEK 1740 / 1750 / 1760 SDTV
D TEK WFM 300/300A SDTV
D Philips PT 5664 SDTV
Max. cable length
D Nokia 0,6/2,8/4,7 double shielded:
up to 5 m /AF/75 W
D Nokia 1,0/4,7/7,4 double shielded:
up to 20 m /AF/75 W
For cable lengths more than 25 m, cable
equalizers are recommended.
Control
Via cheapernet interface
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-11
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.7
INPUT / OUTPUT INTERFACES
iMCS
D 4x RJ45 connectors, twisted pair cables, distribution by internal HUB
D 1x BNC (internal HUB)
D Standard IEEE 802.3
D RJ45 terminal panel plus internal hub for up to
4 remote panels to telecine controllers
D Cable length:
FRS OUT
< 100 m
D BNC
D FREEZE SIGNAL marking repeated fields,
TTL - Pulse
D Polarity configurable
CFR IN
Input used for synchronization of the telecine to a
controller / programmer / editor (pulldown, fixed
speed sequences)
TTL - Pulse
CFR OUT
Output used for synchronization of a telecine controller / programmer / editor (pulldown, fixed speed
sequences)
TTL - Pulse
SEPMAG OUT
D Sepmag interface
D D-sub 9-pole female
D Configurable to
10x Bi Phase (250 / 240 Hz) or
2x Bi Phase (50 / 48)
1x Bi Phase (25 / 24)
EXTERN AUX
D Telecine controller interface
D 25-pin sub D, female
D SOF_Film, SOF_Studio (FRID), FWD/REV, ..
LTC OUT
D Linear time code interface
compatible to SMPTE 12M standard
D XLR male connector
2-12
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.7.1
VIDEO
DIGITAL VIDEO OUT
D CCIR 656 LINK A / B
D D sub 25 pin, female parallel
and BNC serial
D 4 : 2 : 2 or 4 x 4 format
D 8:4:4
D Y, CB, CR, K
ANALOG VIDEO OUT
D BNC
D R, G, B, S, K or Y, CB, CR, S, K
EXT REF
2.7.2
BNC input for ext. reference sync
AUDIO (optional)
DIGITAL OUT 1/2
XLR male
ANALOG IN 1
XLR female balanced audio input channel 1
ANALOG IN 2
XLR female balanced audio input channel 2
ANALOG OUT 1
XLR male
balanced audio output channel 1
ANALOG OUT 2
XLR male
balanced audio output channel 2
SR IN 1
XLR female balanced Dolby-SR/SRD-audio input
channel 1
SR IN 2
XLR female balanced Dolby-SR/SRD-audio input
channel 2
SR OUT 1
XLR male
balanced audio output to a Dolby-SR
processor channel 1
SR OUT 2
XLR male
balanced audio output to a Dolby-SR
processor channel 2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
channel 1,2
(AES/EBU format)
2-13
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MONITOR L
XLR male
balanced audio output to an active
speaker, left channel
MONITOR R
XLR male
balanced audio output to an active
speaker, right channel
Audio Ref
Audio Synchronization
2.7.3
48 kHz IN
BNC, female,
48 kHz clock input to synchronize the audio
processor with external digital audio components
48 kHz OUT
BNC, female,
48 kHz clock output to synchronize external digital
audio components
WAVEFORM MONITORING
ANALOG OUT
BNC: For waveform monitoring only!
CTRL
D-sub15-pin female connector for remote control
of waveform monitor or vectorscope
R, G, B, S
Maximum Cable Length: 50 m (150 feet)
2-14
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
2.8
OPTIONS
2.8.1
AUDIO
Audio format:
COMMAG 16mm,
MONO
COMOPT 35mm,
MONO/STEREO
COMOPT 16mm,
MONO
Inputs:
Input
ANALOG IN 1, L
Level
LEVEL switchable
ANALOG IN 2, R
-3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB
below normal level
balanced, floating
SR IN 1
LEVEL switchable
SR IN 2
-3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB
below normal level
balanced, floating
Impedance
> 10 kW
> 10 kW
Outputs:
Output
ANALOG OUT 1
Level
LEVEL switchable
ANALOG OUT 2
-3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB
below normal level
balanced, floating
MONITOR L
LEVEL switchable
< 40 W
MONITOR R
-3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB
below normal level
active speaker
balanced, floating
volume control off to +6dB
LEVEL switchable
SR OUT 1
SR OUT 2
balanced, floating
DIGITAL OUT 1/2
required
< 40 W
-3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB
below normal level
5 Vpp
Test oscillator:
1 kHz and 10 kHz
-3 / 0 / +4 / +8 dBm switchable to ANALOG OUT
Frequency response:
1 kHz reference, 10 dB below full level
COMOPT
Impedance
< 40 W
110 W
16 mm
40 Hz ... 8 kHz
- 2 dB .. + 2 dB
35 mm
40 Hz .. 12,5 kHz
- 2 dB .. + 2 dB
Measured with comopt sound frequency test film
according to DIN 15506
COMMAG
16 mm
40 Hz ... 12,5 kHz
"2 dB
Measured with commag sound frequency test film
according to DIN 15638 BF 16
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-15
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S/N ratio:
COMOPT
S/N ratio weighted (CCIR 468-4):
16 mm
35 mm
> 52 dB
> 60 dB
S/N ratio unweighted r.m.s:
16 mm
35 mm
> 58 dB
> 66 dB
Reference measured at full level (+ 6 dBu / + 9
dBu with 9 dB lead,+ 12 dBu / + 16 dBu with 8
dB lead),
Shadow Telecine running without film but comopt
lamp switched on, measured with peak voltage
meter according to CCIR 468-4.
Audio Delay
2-16
Speed controlled digital audio delay for the compensation of the sound to picture offset.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.8.2
DATA OUTPUT (PHANTOM TRANSFER ENGINE TE 4101)
System application
High-speed film data output for film processing and
archiving
Data resolution
(Image Size)
D Selectable
256.....2048
256.....1832
horizontal:
vertical:
D Fixed square pixel formats:
File format
1920 x 1080,
720 x 540
720 x 405
D HIPPI FP ANSI x3.210 - 1992
D DPX format, according to SMPTE 268M-1994
(3x10-bit RGB, Cineon compatible)
data segmentation:
tion;
Thomson
implementa-
only image data and file
information, no control
data
Transfer rate
(Film speed)
Depending on system configuration and selected
image size
e.g.: ~ 5 fps for 1920x1440 10-bit RGB pixel
Data interface
parallel
D 32 bit / 100 MB/s HIPPI source; only output;
100 pin parallel connector;
HIPPI-PH ANSI X3.183-1991,
cable length t 25 m (cable not supplied)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-17
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data interface
serial
D HIPPI-Serial (ANSI X.3.300-1997)
32 bit (800 Mbit/s) configuration, dual simplex
connection
Transmission:1.2 Gbit/s, 850 nm typ.;
VCSEL light source;
Signalling sequence and
protocol compatible;
HIPPI-PH ANSI X3.183-1991;
Overhead bits OHI to OH7 not
supported;
Reception: link control, 770 to 860 nm center
wavelength 0 to - 17 dbm optical
power range;
Optical Duplex SC Connector
AEL Class I laser per EN 60825-1
Transmitting distance up to 500 m with
50/125mm MMF cable.
2-18
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.8.3
ROTATION
-180o to +180o image rotation also available in
STOP
Range
2.8.4
HDTV
TV standards
1250/50
1125/60
1920 x 1080 / 60 and 59.94
1280 x 720p / 60 and 59.94
Display formats
full screen
and horizontal / vertical letterbox
Fixed speeds
See corresponding SDTV speeds for
50 Hz standards
1125/59.94
2:1 interlace
2:1 interlace
progressive
4:3 and 16:9
–> 625 lines / 50 Hz
59.94 Hz standards
–> 525 lines / 59.94 Hz
for 1125 lines / 60 Hz
30, 24, 18, 12, 6
fps
X-Y Zoom
Typical area magnification / HDTV
x 0.05 to x 1.5
Resolution
Depth of modulation 0.5 MHz to 18 MHz.
For center & corner
(Film losses not taken into account)
> 40%
Signal / Noise ratio
Measured with ND=1 in the vision gate, γ= 0.4:
> 50 dB
for all channels
Digital Video Out
D CCIR Link A, B
D sub 50 pin
D ”4 : 2 : 2 ” or ”4 x 4”
D Pinning according to CCIR TG11
D Serial 2xBNC via included converters
Note: Standard 1250 - 50 Hz only in parallel
mode available.
Analog Video Out
D BNC
D R, G, B, S, K or Y, CB, CR, S, K
D Filtering according to EU95 - Nov. 1992
EXT REF
D BNC input for external trilevel sync
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-19
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.8.5
OPTION DTV (REQUIRES HDTV OPTION)
TV standard
D 1280 x 720 / 60 Hz progressive
D 1280 x 720 / 59.94 Hz progressive
D 1920 x 1080 / 24 Hz progressive
D 1920 x 1080 / 23.98 Hz progressive
D 1920 x 1080 / 25 Hz progressive
D 1920 x 1080 / 24 segmented frame
D 1920 x 1080 / 23.98 segmented frame
D 1920 x 1080 / 50 interlaced 2:1
Extern Reference
With analog trilevel sync according to SMPTE
296M (1280 x 720 P)
or
SEMPTE 274M (1920 x 1080) is possible
Monitoring
At post spatial processor test points only the first
921 pixels of a line are displayed.
Film speeds
D 60 Hz standards
30, 24, 18, 12, 6
fps
D 59.94 Hz standards
29.97, 22.98,
17.98, 11.99,
5.99 fps
D 24 Hz standards
D 23.98 Hz standards
24, 18, 12, 6 fps
2-20
23.98, 17.98,
11.99, 5.99 fps
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.8.6
OPTION VISTAVISION (REQUIRES OPTION ROTATION)
Film size format
D FA 35mm 8-perf (Vistavision)
Resolution:
horizontal scan lines
vertical scan pixels
1500
1920
D FA 35mm 6-perf (Cinerama)
In 6-perf and 8-perf, ACA emulation and marker
insertion are not supported.
Fixed speeds
D 50 Hz standards
25, 12.5, 6.25
fps
D 59.94 Hz standards
29.97, 17.98,
11.99, 5.99 fps
D 60 Hz standards
30, 18, 12, 6 fps
Select a speed
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2.00 - 31.00 fps
2-21
2. Specifications
STE-B1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2.8.7
6-SECTOR COLOR PROCESSOR
System
Secondary Color Processing
The design and implementation is 100% digital
integrating perfectly within the high speed digital
signal processing architecture of the Telecine.
It employs up to 16 bit quantization and operates
in real time at up to 2K resolutions.
Color Qualification
D 6 Sectors (Hue)
(selection of the color that is to be modified)
Sector adjustment (Hue)
Color Modification
Master Correction
Red, Yellow,
Green, Cyan,
Blue, Magenta;
D 6 x Position
-300... 0 ...+30o
D 6 x Width
1800 ...600 ...150
Correction of the selected sector
D Luminance
0 ..100% .. 200%
D Saturation
0 ..100% ...200%
D Hue
-1800 ..0 ..+1800
D Master Saturation
0 ..100% ...200%
(all other Master Corrections as such as lift, gain
and gamma are functions of the Primary Color
Processor of the basic Shadow Telecine)
Limiter & Legalizer
D Limiter in Luminance
Soft or hard clipping switchable
100%, 102%,
108%
Clip levels adjustable
D Legalizer in Chrominance
Saturation remains within selected legal limits:
RGB
Control
Functional Control Panel:
All 6 SC Processor controls are provided
Operator Control
Via external Controllers / Programmers / Color
Correction Systems
e.g. from Pandora, DaVinci ...
2-22
100%, 102%,
108%
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
2. Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Control Interface
Via serial iMCS bus
The Mounting & Operating Instructions are described in the Customer Manual FU 0095, order
no. 0 126 629 500
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
2-23
2. Specifications
2-24
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.
3. System Applications
SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
The Shadow Telecine STE-B1 may be connected to a great variety of video, audio,
data processing and controller equipment.
It can be equipped with all necessary digital and analog outputs.
This chapter will give the user some examples of typical Telecine applications.
The Telecine configurations are made in the main menus of the GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel.
Trademarks
All brand and product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
Technical changes
Technical information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-1
3. System Applications
3-2
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.1
3. System Applications
SDTV Film to Tape Application / Pandora “Pogle” and Noise Reducer VS 4
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
Video Sweetener VS 4
J 31/J 32
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
SDTV, Link A
Keycode Readers,
cabling see chapter
3.8 and 3.9 in this section.
J 21
J 24
D1 Out 4:2:2
J 33/J34
J 31
J 17
IN
1
Noise & Dirt
Processor
J 40
HiPPI
Serial Out
SDTV
Sync out
3
Contour
Processor
J 23 J 30
Link A Link B
Out 1
2
Serial
IN 1
J 25/32
RS 422
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
J 55
MONITORING
J3
J 27 J 34
Link A Link B
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
10Base2
1
2
Link B
LTC out
AC Power IN
Terminal
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
B
S
VCR
LTC in
CFR out
MAU4/
EXT HUB
R
G
B
SDTV Video
Monitor
Digital
J 15
B
A
Video IN
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
10Base-T
G
Dig IN
Serial
Extern aux
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Rem Ctrl 1 R
Serial A
J 29
J 41 B
8
WFM
Tek 601
J 22
SDTV, Link B
Link A
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Serial A
Vektorscope
Tek 601
Dig Out
Serial
REM 2
Serial
IN 2
A
Video Out
4:2:2
DCP
Digital Color Processor
“Pandora”
S
Rem 1
SGI
Monitor
REM
Wave Form Monitor
1. Philips PT 5464 HD (no CE mark)
2. Tek 1735 / 1735 HD
3. Tek WFM 300 / 300 A
iMCS
J5
GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel
incl. P.S.U.
SCSI
External
Floppy Drive
Scene Change Detector
Extern aux SOF
FRI
CFR In
Telecine Controller
Pogle Interface
SDTV
Sync In
Aux Bus
Aux Bus
6 Hz
Pogle SCSI Bus
Remote
Control
Noise
Video
Telecine Controller
Pogle Workstation
“Pandora”
SCSI
SCSI
Expansion
Bus
Control
Workstation
SGI – O2
SDI In 4:2:2
GPI Out
Legend:
Monitor
Pogle SCSI Bus
Ethernet
PAL/NTSC
Remote
Control
9 pin D-Sub min
15 pin D-Sub min
GPI In / Port 1
25 pin D-Sub min
13W3 D-Sub min
50W
Ethernet
10 Base–T
PS 2
Coax
Keyboard
Ethernet 10 Base-T
Control Panel
Pandora Pogle
SCSI
Control
RS 422
Dual Fibre Connector
Keyboard
Fibre Connector
XLR Connector, male
XLR Connector, female
Fig. 301: Shadow Telecine with telecine controller Pandora “Pogle“ and Noise Reducer VS 4
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-3
3. System Applications
3-4
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.2
3. System Applications
SDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / Pandora “Pogle”, Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine
J 32
SDTV, Link A
RGB / Data out
J 41/J 40/J 37
50
Rack 2
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
RGB / Data in
J 57/J 58/J 59
Rack 3
50
Keycode Readers,
cabling see chapter
3.8 and 3.9 in this section.
RGB Data in
J 11/J 12/J 13
3
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
50
RGB / Data out
J 2/J 3/J 4
3
50
J 66
SGR 2000
SCREAM
IN
1
Pulses
15
iMCS
J6
SDTV, Link B
Out 1
J 31
J 40
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
10Base-T out4
MONITORING
10Base-T out3
LTC out
HiPPI
Serial Out
J3
J 41 B
10Base2
1
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
LTC in
R
B
G
B
S
MAU4/
EXT HUB
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
from RJ45
Ethernet
Tranceiver
SGR 2000
S
B
A
Video IN
CFR out
10Base-T
G
SDTV Video
Monitor
Digital
VCR
Dig Out
Serial
REM 2
Serial
IN 2
Extern aux
J 15
Rem Ctrl 1 R
Dig IN
Serial
RJ45/10Base-T connector
to MAU2 STE-B1
SDTV
Sync out
J 55
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Dual Fibre Cable
Serial
IN 1
Ethernet
Transceiver
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
8
2
15
SDTV, Link A
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Serial A
3
J 33/J34
AC Power IN
Terminal
Vektorscope
Tek 601
WFM
Tek 601
2
J 14
Pulses out
Serial A
A
Video Out
4:2:2
DCP
Digital Color Processor
“Pandora”
Rem 1
SGI
Monitor
REM
Wave Form Monitor
iMCS
J5
1. Philips PT 5464 HD (no CE mark)
GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel
2. Tek 1735 / 1735 HD
3. Tek WFM 300 / 300 A
SCSI
incl. P.S.U.
External
Floppy Drive
Phantom Transfer Engine e.g. TE 4101
Scene Change Detector
Data Recorder
Exabyte
Monitor
PAL/NTSC
Extern aux SOF
USCSI
FRI
CFR In
Telecine Controller
Pogle Interface
SDTV
Sync In
Aux Bus
Aux Bus
USCSI
Monitor
Workstation
SGI-Octane
Fibre C.
Disk-Array
Remote
Control
SCSI
Expansion
Bus
Control
Workstation
SGI – O2
CD-Rom
SCSI
SCSI
SDI In 4:2:2
GPI Out
Legend:
Monitor
Pogle SCSI Bus
Ethernet
Video
SCSI
9 pin D-Sub min
15 pin D-Sub min
GPI In / Port 1
25 pin D-Sub min
13W3 D-Sub min
50W
Fibre C.
HiPPI Out
100 b-T
Pogle SCSI Bus
Fibre C.
Noise
Telecine Controller
Pogle Workstation
“Pandora”
6 Hz
Data In
Remote
Control
Network
Fibre Channel
to
Virtual Datacine
Ethernet
10 Base–T
PS 2
Coax
Keyboard
Ethernet 10 Base-T
Control Panel
Pandora Pogle
Keyboard
SCSI
Control
RS 422
Dual Fibre Connector
Keyboard
Keyboard
Fibre Connector
XLR Connector, male
XLR Connector, female
Fig. 302: Shadow Telecine with telecine controller Pandora “Pogle“, SGR 2000 and Phantom Transfer Engine
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-5
3. System Applications
3-6
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.3
3. System Applications
SDTV Film to Tape Application / DaVinci “Renaissance” and Noise Reducer VS 4
Video Sweetener VS 4
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
J 31/J 32
J 24
SDTV
Link A
Link A IN
J 21
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
J 17
D1 Out 4:2:2
Keycode Readers,
cabling see chapter
3.8 and 3.9 in this section.
J 31
J 33/ J34
2
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Contour
Processor
J 23 J 30
J 27 J 34
Link A Link B Link A Link B
J 40
10Base2
1
3
Link B Out
Noise & Dirt
Processor
AC Power IN
Terminal
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
J 29
Link B IN
SDTV
Link B
8
Out 1
2
Serial
IN 1
J 25/32
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
MONITORING
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
J3
G
B
S
Digital
4:2:2
J 55
Dig IN
Serial
Extern aux
VCR
LTC in
SDTV Sync In
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Rem Ctrl 1 R
SDTV
Video Monitor
RS 422
SDTV
Sync out
HiPPI
Serial Out
Vektorscope
Tek 601
Serial A
J 22
Link A Out
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Serial A
IN
1
WFM
Tek 601
J 41 B
REM 2
A
B
Video In
A
B
Video Out
Serial
IN 2
Dig Out
Serial
NR
Black Ref.
MAU4/
EXT HUB
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
LTC out
Extern aux SOF
Mainframe
Da Vinci
Renaissance 8:8:8
R
G
B
S
Rem 1
10Base-T
A
Ethernet
T-Net Shadow
Wave Form Monitor
1. Philips PT 5464 HD (no CE mark)
2. Tek 1735 / 1735 HD
3. Tek WFM 300 / 300 A
XFR B
SGI
Monitor
iMCS
J5
50W
T–Net Indy
GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel
SCSI
Terminator
incl. P.S.U.
Power Supply
Unit
External
Floppy Drive
Ethernet
Transceiver
SDI In
4:2:2
10 Base 2
50W
SCSI
50W
Workstation
SGI – 02
Monitor
Legend:
9 pin D-Sub min
15 pin D-Sub min
10 Base- T
Soft Panel
Joyball Panel
25 pin D-Sub min
Machine
Control
Ethernet
10 Base-T
13W3 D-Sub min
Coax
Control Panel Renaissance
Port 2
Port 1
Keyboard
Ethernet
Repeater
Power Supply Unit
Ethernet 10 Base-T
SCSI
Dual Fibre Connector
Fibre Connector
Keyboard
XLR Connector, male
XLR Connector, female
Fig. 303: Shadow Telecine with telecine controller Da Vinci “Renaissance” and VS 4
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-7
3. System Applications
3-8
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.4
3. System Applications
SDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / DaVinci “Renaissance”, Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine
J 32
SDTV, Link A
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
RGB / Data out
J 41/J 40/J 37
50
Rack 2
RGB / Data in
J 57/J 58/J 59
Rack 3
50
Keycode Readers,
cabling see chapter
3.8 and 3.9 in this section.
RGB Data in
J 11/J 12/J 13
3
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
50
RGB / Data out
J 2/J 3/J 4
3
50
J 66
IN
1
SGR 2000
SCREAM
Pulses
15
iMCS
J6
3
J 33/ J34
AC Power IN
Terminal
WFM
Tek 601
2
J 14
Pulses out
Serial A
Out 1
SDTV Link B
2
15
Serial
IN 1
J 31
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
8
SDTV Link A
10Base2
1
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Ethernet
Transceiver
J 40
G
B
S
A
B
Video In
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
LTC out
Serial
IN 2
Dig Out
Serial
LTC in
REM 2
Extern aux
J 41 B
MAU4/
EXT HUB
VCR
Dig IN
Serial
J 55
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Rem Ctrl 1 R
RJ45/10Base-T connector
to MAU2 STE-B1
SDTV
Sync out
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
MONITORING
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
HiPPI
Serial Out
SDTV
Video Monitor
Digital
4:2:2
J3
Vektorscope
Tek 601
Serial A
A
B
Video Out
SDTV Sync In
G
R
B
S
Rem 1
Extern aux SOF
A
10Base-T
Dual Fibre Cable
Black Ref.
from RJ45
Ethernet
Tranceiver
SGR 2000
Mainframe
Da Vinci
Renaissance 8:8:8
XFR B
Ethernet
T-Net Shadow
Wave Form Monitor
1. Philips PT 5464 HD (no CE mark)
SGI
Monitor
iMCS
J5
2. Tek 1735 / 1735 HD
50W
T–Net Indy
GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel
3. Tek WFM 300 / 300 A
SCSI
Terminator
incl. P.S.U.
Ethernet
Transceiver
Power Supply
Unit
Phantom Transfer Engine e.g. TE 4101
External
Floppy Drive
Data Recorder
Exabyte
Monitor
USCSI
SDI In
4:2:2
10 Base 2
50W
SCSI
Workstation
SGI – 02
50W
Data In
USCSI
Monitor
Workstation
SGI-Octane
Fibre C.
Disk-Array
Soft Panel
CD-Rom
SCSI
Network
Fibre Channel
to
Virtual Datacine
Joyball Panel
9 pin D-Sub min
15 pin D-Sub min
25 pin D-Sub min
Machine
Control
Ethernet
10 Base-T
13W3 D-Sub min
Coax
Control Panel Renaissance
Port 2
Port 1
100
Base-T
(option)
Keyboard
Keyboard
Power Supply Unit
Ethernet 10 Base-T
SCSI
Ethernet
Repeater
SCSI
Keyboard
Legend:
10 Base- T
Fibre C.
Fibre C.
HiPPI Out
100 b-T
Monitor
Dual Fibre Connector
Fibre Connector
Keyboard
XLR Connector, male
XLR Connector, female
Fig. 304: Shadow Telecine with telecine controller Da Vinci “Renaissance”, SGR 2000 and Phantom Transfer Engine
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-9
3. System Applications
3-10
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.5
3. System Applications
SDTV Film to Tape Application / DaVinci “2K” and Noise Reducer VS 4
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
J 31/J 32
J 24
Keycode Readers,
cabling see chapter
3.8 and 3.9 in this section.
Link A IN
J 33/J 34
AC Power IN
Terminal
L1 L2 L3 N PE
FRS
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
10Base2
1
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
J 23 J 30
J 27 J 34
Link A Link B Link A Link B
G
B
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
S
Serial
IN 1
Dig IN
Serial
From STE-B1
FRS, J 71 (Freeze Signal)
Extern Aux
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
SDTV Sync In
LTC out
A
B
SDTV
Input 1
A
B
SDTV
Output 1
2
J 25/32
RS 422
J 41 B
MAU4/
EXT HUB
Out 1
J 55
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Rem Ctrl 1 R
3
Contour
Processor
Noise & Dirt
Processor
SDTV
Sync Out
MONITORING
2
J 29
Link B Out
J 40
Vektorscope
Tek 601
Serial A
WFM
Tek 601
J 22
Link B IN
FRS
to Disk Recorder
Serial A
IN
1
Link A Out
J 71
8
J 17
D1 Out 4:2:2
J 31
SDTV
Link B
HiPPI
Serial Out
J 21
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
SDTV
Link A
J3
Video Sweetener VS 4
Dig Out
Serial
SDTV
Video Monitor
Digital
Dig IN
Serial
VCR
GPI
REM
Video Disk Recorder
REM
Dig Out
Serial
LTC in
Serial
IN 2
Quickframe/Sierra
NR
Serial
XFR A
Extern aux SOF
Telecine A
10Base-T
Mainframe
Da Vinci
2K
R
G
B
XFR B
S
Rem 1
Wave Form Monitor
1. Philips PT 5464 HD (no CE mark)
SGI
Monitor
iMCS
2. Tek 1735 / 1735 HD
J5
3. Tek WFM 300 / 300 A
GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel
100b T E-Net2
100b T E-Net1
SCSI
Terminator
incl. P.S.U.
External
Floppy Drive
SDI In
4:2:2
10 Base 2
50W
SCSI
Workstation
SGI – 02
Legend:
9 pin D-Sub min
15 pin D-Sub min
Monitor
Soft Panel
Joyball Panel
10 Base- T
Machine
Control
25 pin D-Sub min
Ethernet
10 Base-T
13W3 D-Sub min
Coax
Control Panel Renaissance
Port 2
Port 1
Keyboard
Ethernet 10 Base-T
SCSI
Ethernet
Repeater
Dual Fibre connector
Fibre connector
Power Supply Unit
Keyboard
XLR Connector, male
XLR Connector, female
Fig. 305: Shadow Telecine with telecine controller Da Vinci “2K” and VS 4
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-11
3. System Applications
3-12
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.6
3. System Applications
SDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / DaVinci “2K”, Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine
J 32
SDTV, Link A
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
Keycode Readers,
cabling see chapter
3.8 and 3.9 in this section.
RGB / Data out
J 41/J 40/J 37
50
Rack 2
3
RGB / Data in
J 57/J 58/J 59
Rack 3
50
3
RGB Data in
J 11/J 12/J 13
50
RGB / Data out
J 2/J 3/J 4
50
J 66
2
Pulses
15
iMCS
J6
3
SDTV Link A
10Base2
1
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
MONITORING
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
HiPPI
Serial Out
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
B
J 40
FRS
to Disk Recorder
MAU4/
EXT HUB
Dig IN
Serial
SDTV
Sync Out
J 55
RJ45/10Base-T connector
to MAU3 STE-B1
From STE-B1
FRS, J 71 (Freeze Signal)
Dig Out
Serial
SDTV
Video Monitor
Digital
Dig IN
Serial
A
B
SDTV
Input 1
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
REM
A
B
SDTV
Output 1
VCR
GPI
Video Disk Recorder
Extern Aux
J 41 B
S
Serial
IN 1
FRS
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
G
2
Ethernet
Transceiver
J 71
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
8
Out 1
15
J 31
Rem Ctrl 1 R
Serial A
IN
1
Vektorscope
Tek 601
Serial A
WFM
Tek 601
SDTV Link B
L1 L2 L3 N PE
J3
SGR 2000
SCREAM
J 14
Pulses out
J 33/J 34
AC Power IN
Terminal
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
Dig Out
Serial
LTC in
REM
Serial
IN 2
Quickframe/Sierra
LTC out
XFR A
from RJ45
Ethernet Tranceiver
SGR 2000
Dual Fibre Cable
10Base-T
SDTV Sync In
R
G
B
Extern aux SOF
S
Mainframe
Da Vinci
2K
XFR B
Telecine A
Rem 1
Wave Form Monitor
1. Philips PT 5464 HD (no CE mark)
SGI
Monitor
iMCS
2. Tek 1735 / 1735 HD
J5
3. Tek WFM 300 / 300 A
GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel
100b T E-Net2
100b T E-Net1
SCSI
Terminator
incl. P.S.U.
External
Floppy Drive
Phantom Transfer Engine e.g. TE 4101
Monitor
USCSI
Data Recorder
e.g.Exabyte
SDI In
4:2:2
10 Base 2
50W
Data In
Monitor
Workstation
SGI-Octane
Disk-Array
USCSI
Fibre C.
SCSI
Soft Panel
Network
Fibre Channel
to
Virtual Datacine
Joyball Panel
SCSI
10 Base- T
Machine
Control
9 pin D-Sub min
15 pin D-Sub min
25 pin D-Sub min
Ethernet
10 Base-T
13W3 D-Sub min
Coax
Control Panel Renaissance
Port 2
Port 1
CD-Rom
100 b-T
Legend:
Monitor
Fibre C.
Fibre C.
HiPPI Out
Workstation
SGI – 02
100
Base-T
(option)
Keyboard
SCSI
Ethernet
Repeater
SCSI
Keyboard
Ethernet 10 Base-T
Dual Fibre connector
Fibre connector
Keyboard
Power Supply Unit
Keyboard
XLR Connector, male
XLR Connector, female
Fig. 306: Shadow Telecine with telecine controller Da Vinci “2K”, SGR 2000 and Phantom Transfer Engine
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-13
3. System Applications
3-14
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3. System Applications
3.7
HDTV Film to Tape and Data Application / DaVinci “2K”, Grain Reducer SCREAM and Phantom Transfer Engine
RGB / Data out
J 41/J 40/J 37
50
Rack 2
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
RGB / Data in
J 57/J 58/J 59
Rack 3
50
Keycode Readers,
cabling see chapter
3.8 and 3.9 in this section.
J 35
RGB Data in
J 11/J 12/J 13
3
50
3
50
J 66
Pulses
S
Sync out
AC Power IN
Terminal
Sync In
LTC out
J 27
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
10Base2
1
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
HiPPI
Serial Out
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
10Base-T out4
MONITORING
10Base-T out3
HDTV Link A
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
G
B
R
G
B
LTC in
HD Parallel
Vide Input
1x Serializer
HD 10 SR
(FH 1630)
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
REM 2
HD Parallel
Vide Input
HD SDI Out
1x Serializer
HD 10 SR
(FH 1630)
HD SDI In
Extern aux
Hi-Def A/B Hi-Def C/D
Hi–Def
Input
HDTV Sync
loop
Wave Form Monitor
incl. P.S.U.
Hi-Def C/D
Hi–Def
Output
Hi-Def A/B
XFR B
S
iMCS
J5
GCP1 Graphical
Control Panel
HDTV WFM
e. g.
Sony / Tektronix
WFM 1125
SGI
Monitor
S
2. Tek 1735 / 1735 HD
HD SDI In
Serial 4:2:2
Rem 1
3. Tek WFM 300 / 300 A
Down
Converter
SDI Out
HD SDI Out
from RJ45
Ethernet Tranceiver
SGR 2000
1. Philips PT 5464 HD (no CE mark)
HD SDI Out
SDI In
S
S
HD SDI In
HDTV Video
Monitor
HD SDI Out
J 28
J 55
R
Voodoo
Media Recorder
DCR 6024
(D6-Tape) HD SDI Out
HD SDI Out
HDTV Link B
MAU4/
EXT HUB
Dual Fibre Cable
S
J 41 B
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Rem Ctrl
SGR 2000
SCREAM
J 37
Sync 1
RJ45/10Base-T connector
to MAU2 STE-B1
15
15
J 14
Pulses out
J3
iMCS
RGB / Data out
J 2/J 3/J 4
Ethernet
Transceiver
J6
Extern aux SOF
Telecine A
10 Base-T
SCSI
Terminator
Monitor
Mainframe
Da Vinci
2K
External
Floppy Drive
Data Mon Out
Phantom Transfer Engine e.g. TE 4101
Monitor
Data Recorder
e.g.Exabyte
100b T E-Net1
100b T E-Net2
SCSI
10 Base 2
USCSI
50W
Monitor
Data In
Monitor
USCSI
Fibre C.
Workstation
SGI-Octane
Fibre C.
Disk-Array
SDI In
Soft Panel
Network
Fibre Channel
to
Virtual Datacine
Fibre C.
HiPPI Out
Joyball Panel
Control Panel Renaissance
CD-Rom
SCSI
Keyboard
Legend:
9 pin D-Sub min
15 pin D-Sub min
25 pin D-Sub min
10 Base-T
Machine
Control
13W3 D-Sub min
Ethernet
10 Base-T
Port 1
Port 2
100
Base-T
Coax
(option)
Keyboard
Ethernet 10 Base-T
SCSI
SCSI
Ethernet
Repeater
Keyboard
100
Base-T
Workstation
SGI – 02
Power Supply Unit
Dual Fibre connector
Fibre connector
Keyboard
XLR Connector, male
XLR Connector, female
Fig. 307: Shadow Telecine with telecine controller Da Vinci “2K”, SGR 2000 and Phantom Transfer Engine
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-15
3. System Applications
3-16
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3.8
3. System Applications
Waveform Monitoring
Monitoring
FY 1408
STE-B1
Videodata
4 BNC
loop through
inputs
From
Rack 2
FCC
FY 6211
From
Rack 3
SOI
FY 6312
From
Rack 3
HOD
FY 6313
From
external
not used
15-pin subminiatur
D-Connector
15-pin
subminiatur
D-Connector
4 BNC
loop through
inputs
CH 1-R
CH 2-G
CH 3-B
S
Local 1
For example:
WFM only used for HDTV
Remote Control 1
15
Remote Control 2
15
+
Output Driver
PC 354
Local 2
For example:
WFM only used for SDTV
Shadow Rack 2
15-pin subminiature
D-connector
male
Rem CTRL Pins
1-8 and 11-15
pin 5
pin 6
pin 7
pin 9
GND Pin 9
Waveform Monitoring FY 1408
Connection Cable
Interface cable “Remote Control” from Shadow Rack 2 to WFM TEK 1740-1760
TEK 1740-1760
25-pin subminiature
D-connector
male
Recall 2 Superimposed
Recall 3 Vector
Recall 1 Parade
GND
pin 18
pin 19
pin 17
pin 14
Waveform Monitor
Note:
Interface cable “Remote Control” from Shadow Rack 2 to PT 5664
Disconnect pin 1 of the control cable PT 5664, otherwise the remote
control functions are disturbed.
Fig. 308: Waveform Monitoring
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
3-17
3. System Applications
3-18
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3. System Applications
3.9
Keycode Applications EVERTZ
3.9.1
Keycode in SDTV, LTC-Out and VITC
J 21 J 19 J 20
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
R
G
B
SDTV, Link A
J 31/J 32
J 22
Video
Video and VITC
S
J 21
D1 Out 4:2:2
J 17
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
Video in
J 51
Keycode Reader EVERTZ
Video Sweetener VS 4
J 24
Film Footage Encoder
Model 4025TR
Bi phase in
TC Gen out
J 15
J 31
IN
1
J 22
Link A
2
J 29
CFR out
Film Time Code Data
and User Bits
Frame pulse in
Link B
Noise & Dirt
Processor
RS 232 Keycode Data
Aux I/O
J 27 J 34
Link A Link B
J 40
AC Power IN
Terminal
Configuration and Conrol
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
8
L1 L2 L3 N PE
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
10Base2
1
3
Contour
Processor
J 23 J 30
Link A Link B
Out 1
J 25/32
2
115 / 230 VAC
RS 422
SDTV
Sync out
Transfer and Event Data
R
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
MONITORING
J3
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
HiPPI
Serial Out
Aux I/O
J 69
G
B
S
MAU4/
EXT HUB
Serial I/O
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
Digital Recorder
D1 / Digi Beta or
Disk Recorder
EVERTZ
Keylog
Tracker
PC
Keycode Reader
Device EVERTZ
From Reader Head
J 41 B
Rem Ctrl 1 R
B
S
601 Video
Monitor
Video and VITC
Extern aux
Keycode In
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
G
IN
J 55
Dig INSerial
Dig OutSerial
Serial
IN 2
TC in
LTC out
115 / 230 VAC
Keycode in LTC user bits
3.9.2
Keycode in Data
J 21 J 19 J 20
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
R
G
J 22
B
SDTV, Link A
J 31/J 32
S
Aux I/O
Keycode Reader
Device EVERTZ
From Reader Head
Keycode Reader EVERTZ
J 51
Cable 1 Keycode for Data
Serial I/O
TC Gen out
J 15
Phantom Transfer Engine e.g. TE 4101
CFR out
Connection cable 1:
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
8
L1 L2 L3 N PE
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
10Base2
1
SDTV
Sync out
10Base-T out1
MONITORING
10Base-T out2
HiPPI
Serial Out
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
J 55
J3
Monitor
J 40
AC Power IN
Terminal
Extern aux
J 69
Keycode In
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Shadow Telecine
9-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
Keycode in
pin
2
3
5
Keycode Reader Device
EVERTZ
9-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
pin
Tx
Rx
GND
3
2
5
Data In
115 / 230 VAC
Monitor
Workstation
SGI-Octane
USCSI
Fibre C.
Disk-Array
Fibre C.
115 / 230 VAC
Network
Fibre Channel
to
Virtual Datacine
Fibre C.
HiPPI Out
115 / 230 VAC
J 41 B
Rem Ctrl 1 R
G
B
S
MAU4/
EXT HUB
SCSI
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
LTC out
Keyboard
Keyboard
3-19
3. System Applications
3-20
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3. System Applications
3.10
Keycode Applications AATON
3.10.1
Keycode in SDTV, LTC-Out and VITC
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
J 21 J 19 J 20
R
G
J 22
B
J 51
S
TC Gen Out
MTC
AATON Keylink PC
Version 8.34
Cable 2
MTC
VITC
only
Biphase
J 33/J34
Com1
Keycode In
J 40
VGA
Link B
Keylink System AATON
MTC Board / Biphase
9-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
pin
pin
CFR out
J 41 B
Rem Ctrl 1 R
3.10.2
G
B
Keycode in LTC user bits
S
MAU4/
EXT HUB
J 27 J 34
Link A Link B
Shadow Telecine
TC Gen Out
9-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
LTC out
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1x or 2x or 10x Bi Phase R Signal
SOF Pulse
not connected
Pre stop
1x or 2x or 10x Bi Phase R Signal
not connected
Ground (Digital)
not connected
+5V (Digital) 300mA max.
2
J 29
Connection cable 2:
Extern aux
J 15
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Link A
Noise & Dirt
Processor
SDTV
Sync out
J 55
10Base-T out1
10Base-T out2
MONITORING
J3
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
HiPPI
Serial Out
10Base2
1
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
IN
1
J 22
J 69
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
4:2:2 Router/Mixer
Video
in
SDTV Link B
8
J 17
J 31
UCR Video
Head
in
SDTV Link A
L1 L2 L3 N PE
D1 Out 4:2:2
VITC
out
VITC
out
Video
AC Power IN
Terminal
J 21
Video and VITC
From Reader Head
J 31/J 32
Keycode Reader AATON
Video Sweetener VS 4
J 24
3
Contour
Processor
J 23 J 30
Link A Link B
Out 1
2
115 / 230 VAC
J 25/32
RS 422
R
G
B
S
IN
601 Video
Monitor
Video and VITC
Digital Recorder
D1 / Digi Beta or
Disk Recorder
7
Dig INSerial
Dig OutSerial
8
shield
Serial
IN 2
115 / 230 VAC
TC in
2
Keycode in Data
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
J 21 J 19 J 20
R
G
J 22
B
S
MTC
AATON Keylink PC
Version 8.34
J 51
MTC
Biphase
TC Gen Out
VITC
out
J 31/J 32
Keycode Reader AATON
VITC
only
UCR Video
Head
in
SDTV Link A
J 33/J34
Com1
VITC
out
Video
in
VGA
Phantom Transfer Engine e.g. TE 4101
SDTV Link B
AC Power IN
Terminal
J 69
Cable 1
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
J3
10Base2
1
10Base-T out1
MONITORING
10Base-T out2
HiPPI
Serial Out
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
G
B
S
SDTV
Sync out
J 55
Extern aux
J 15
CFR out
MAU4/
EXT HUB
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
Monitor
Keycode In
J 40
J 41 B
Rem Ctrl 1 R
Keycode for Data
LTC out
Connection cable 1:
Shadow Telecine
9-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
Keycode in
Keycode Reader Device
AATON
25-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
Com1
pin
pin
2
3
5
9
Data In
Tx
Rx
GND
3
2
7
25
115 / 230 VAC
Monitor
Workstation
SGI-Octane
USCSI
Fibre C.
Disk-Array
Fibre C.
115 / 230 VAC
Network
Fibre Channel
to
Virtual Datacine
Fibre C.
HiPPI Out
115 / 230 VAC
SCSI
Keyboard
Keyboard
3-21
3. System Applications
3-22
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
3. System Applications
3.11
Keycode Application ARRI
3.11.1
Keycode in Data
J 21 J 19 J 20
Shadow Telecine
STE-B1
R
G
J 22
B
SDTV, Link A
J 31/J 32
S
Aux I/O
Keycode Reader
Device ARRI
From Reader Head
Keycode Reader EVERTZ
J 51
Cable 1 Keycode for Data
Serial I/O
TC Gen out
J 15
Phantom Transfer Engine e.g. TE 4101
CFR out
Connection cable 1:
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
8
L1 L2 L3 N PE
10Base-T Network Ports 1 - 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
10Base2
1
SDTV
Sync out
10Base-T out1
MONITORING
10Base-T out2
HiPPI
Serial Out
10Base-T out3
10Base-T out4
J 55
J3
Monitor
J 40
AC Power IN
Terminal
Extern aux
J 69
Keycode In
J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13
Shadow Telecine
9-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
Keycode in
pin
2
3
5
Keycode Reader Device
ARRI
9-pin subminiature
D-connector, male
pin
Tx
Rx
GND
2
3
5
Data In
115 / 230 VAC
Monitor
Workstation
SGI-Octane
USCSI
Fibre C.
Disk-Array
Fibre C.
115 / 230 VAC
Network
Fibre Channel
to
Virtual Datacine
Fibre C.
HiPPI Out
115 / 230 VAC
J 41 B
Rem Ctrl 1 R
G
B
S
MAU4/
EXT HUB
SCSI
MAU3 MAU2 MAU1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
LTC out
Keyboard
Keyboard
3-23
3. System Applications
3-24
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.
4. Installation
INSTALLATION
Important note for the installation!
Before switching on the Shadow Telecine, it is absolutely necessary to install
the separately delivered condenser lenses, with additional heat absorbing
filter, into the lamp house. Otherwise the gray density disk and the film may
be destroyed by the burning projector lamp!
Installation steps:
D Unpacking Shadow Telecine and accessories
D Setting upright
D Establish the recommended ventilation conditions
D Removal of Styrofoam elements
D Installing the Local Control Panel
D Installing the handles at the front doors
D Installing the Graphical Control Panel GCP1
D Connecting an external gateblast compressor
D Mounting the filters and lenses in the lamp house
D Installation of the LGA
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-1
4. Installation
4.1
STE-B1
WARNINGS
The telecine unit weights approx. 1015 lbs / 460 Kg!
Attention:
The telecine unit has to be unpacked and lifted up by authorized forwarding agencies only, with appropriate lifting tool under control and instruction of Thomson service personnel!
Danger of injury when the telecine is being lifted to the upright position!
Mains installation must only be done by qualified personnel!
Power supply in excess of 40 volts are potentially hazards or lethal.
At no time should contact be made with the machine wiring or terminals, except via
a probe with appropriate insulating properties.
The Shadow Telecine is designed to be operated with locked front and rear doors.
The rear doors must only be removed by qualified service personnel for maintenance purposes. The Shadow Telecine cannot operate with open filmdeck doors.
An interlock switch is fitted for safety purposes. Do not modify the operation of this
switch.
4-2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.2
4. Installation
UNPACKING
The telecine unit weights approx. 1015 lbs / 460 Kg!
Attention:
The telecine unit has to be unpacked and lifted up by authorized forwarding
agencies only, with appropriate lifting tool under control and instruction of
Thomson service personnel!
Danger of injury when lifting the telecine to the upright position!
The telecine unit lies on its back in the transport crate. The accessories are contained in a separate transport case.
4.3
INSTRUCTIONS FOR AUTHORIZED FORWARDING AGENCIES ONLY!
Unpacking
D For unpacking, first remove the straps around the transport crate.
D Open the upper fixing screws (fig. 401/A) of the transport crate lid.
D Lift up and remove the transport crate lid (fig. 401/1).
D Remove padding layers.
D Open the fixing screws of the side walls (fig. 401/2, 3) and remove them.
D Cut open the cover foil at the three lower sides and remove it.
Now the Shadow Telecine is prepared to be set upright.
Setting upright
The unit can be set upright only with appropriate lifting tool under control
and instruction of Thomson service personnel!
The unit has a net weight of approx. 1015 lbs or 460 kg and is supported on 4 bottom rollers for moving to its final location.
D Push the cabinet with its bottom approx. 1 – 1.2 inch or 2 – 3 cm close to the
edge of the transport crate (fig. 400).
D Turn the two lower bottom rollers upwards for protection (fig. 400/C).
D Fix two (or four) hooks of the lifting tool onto the two lower (or onto all four) loops
of the cabinet (fig. 400/B).
D Lift up the cabinet slowly while two persons support it from both sides until the
two upper bottom rollers are standing on the floor.
D Continue lifting up until the bottom plate of the transport crate can be pulled out.
Take care that the cabinet cannot roll away.
D Put down the cabinet slowly until the two lower bottom rollers are also standing
on the floor.
Ground load
The floor space amounts 12.1 sq. ft. or 1,12 m2 and results in a ground load of
82 lbs / sq. ft. or 400 kp / m2.
Setting up
The bottom rollers enable the Shadow Telecine to be moved to its final location.
Caution!
Do not move the telecine unit over coarse floor unevenness otherwise the
bottom rollers could be broken.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-3
4. Installation
STE-B1
Transport crate lid
A
A
A
A
A1
A
A
A
A
A
A
2
A
A
3A
A
Padding layers
Padding layers
B = Lift here only
with pulley block
or similar lifting gear
C
B
B
(2 - 3cm)
approx.1inch
B
B
Padding layers
Padding layers
Fig. 401: Transport crate of the Shadow Telecine
4-4
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Peak area load
4. Installation
Four threaded leveling feet are located in the corners of the bottom frame for final
stationing. The feet have a diameter of 32 mm ∅ = 8 cm2. This results in a peak
area load of < 178 lbs / sq. inch or < 12.5 kp / cm2.
Take care that the location is such that the ground loading is not exceeded.
ATTENTION!
Adjust Shadow Telecine in horizontal position with the threaded leveling
feet.
These feet have to be unscrewed with an open wrench, size 17 mm to compensate
the floor unevenness.
For transport, the feet were completely screwed in.
Roller
Roller
Feet
Feet
Feet
Feet
Roller
Roller
Fig. 402: Bottom view of the cabinet
Installation
Mount telecine unit on concrete or other non combustible surface only.
Keep packaging
Please keep the packaging. The Shadow Telecine must only be transported in this
original packaging.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-5
4. Installation
4.4
STE-B1
ACCESSORIES
The accessories are supplied separately in stable cardboard packages.
Check that all parts are delivered.
D FH 4500 Local Control Panel
D Lens Gate Assembly (16 mm or 35 mm)
D Customer’s Manual
D FH 4020 – Basic Accessories
D Set of condenser lenses and filters
Condenser lenses 1 & 2, infrared filter, heat absorbing filter, 3 dichroic filters
for the filter wheel and halogen projection lamp.
D Graphical Control Panel GCP1
D Options if requested
4-6
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.5
4. Installation
SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Mechanical dimensions
1265 mm
49.80 inch
PHILIPS
1942 mm
76.45 inch
STE -B1
788.5 mm
31.04 inch
814 mm
32.05 inch
906 mm
35.67 inch
Fig. 403: Mechanical dimensions of the Shadow Telecine cabinet
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-7
4. Installation
STE-B1
Location
Space
The equipment has to be accessible both from the front and the rear side.
When installing the telecine unit, care should be taken not to cover the fresh air entries, see figure 404.
Ensure that the area is dustfree and the dust cannot enter through ventilation filters.
Operation
temperature
The ambient temperature during operation must not exceed or fall below the range
of +10o C to +35o C.
Air condition is required if the temperature exceeds 35o C or if relative humidity is
higher than 80%.
Optimum operation is at a temperature of +20o C to +30o C.
4-8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Ventilation
4. Installation
The ventilation air stream enters through openings in the bottom frame. Five bottom frame mats protect against dust.
The outgoing air leaves the cabinet from bottom to top. It is either led into the room
or through openings on top of the cabinet to an air outlet system.
The required air throughput is 900 m3/h (1200 cu. yd. / h) for 20o C ambient air temperature.
Outgoing air: 900 m3/h (1200 cu. yd. / h)
Air Exhaust Option
Outlet 2 x 250 mm
Cabinet Fans
Rack 1
Thermal Switch
Fan Unit R1
Lamp Fan
Ventilation Shaft
integrated in the rear doors
Rear Fan Unit R2
Rear Fan Unit R3
Rack 3
Rack 2
Fan Unit R2
Fan Unit R3
Incoming air
Fig. 404: Air ventilation system of the Shadow Telecine
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-9
4. Installation
4-10
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.6
4. Installation
REMOVAL OF STYROFOAM ELEMENTS
In order to protect the electronic devices in the rear of the Shadow, two foam elements are inserted.
D Open the rear doors of the cabinet
D Remove the elements
The foam element 1 stabilizes the Capstan Power Stage during transport. A foam
element 2 stabilizes the Spooling Power Stage.
Rack 1
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Styrofoam element 1
Rack 3
Styrofoam element 2
Rack 2
EXTERN
Fig. 405: Telecine unit, rear view
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-11
4. Installation
4.7
STE-B1
INSTALLING THE LOCAL CONTROL PANEL FH 4500
After having installed the equipment, mount the Local Control Panel FH 4500.
Mounting and connection has to be performed as follows:
D Unpack the control panel.
D Insert the control panel with the guiding bolts into the two provided holes at the
front mask of the equipment and press tightly (fig. 406).
D Doing so, the switch at the rear of the control panel locks automatically into the
socket at the equipment.
D Fasten the control panel from below with the two threaded pins M4 using a 2mm
hex socket-head wrench (fig. 407). For this procedure, the two lower doors of
the cabinet have to be opened.
Fig. 406: Local Control Panel FH 4500
Fastening screw
Fastening screw
Guiding bolts
Guiding bolts
Fig. 407: Fastening screws of the Local Control Panel
Note:
4-12
Should it happen, that due to a technical disturbance, the electronic door
lock cannot be unlocked, it is possible to manually unlock the door lock, see
section 3 Servicing, chapter 3.17 in the Service Manual.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.8
4. Installation
INSTALLING THE HANDLES AT THE FILMDECK FRONT DOORS
In order to protect the door handles for transport, the handles are mounted inside
of the doors. After unpacking the unit, the door handles have to be mounted at the
outside of the doors (fig. 409). Washers and screws are delivered with the handles.
Fig. 408: Front door handle of the film deck
Washers
Screws
Handle
Fig. 409: Mounting the door handle
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-13
4. Installation
4-14
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
4.9
INSTALLING GRAPHICAL CONTROL PANEL GCP1
4.9.1
DESK MOUNTING
4.9.1.1
Fixed Desk Mounting
wood screws
(4mm countersunk)
below front plate
panel locking
(3mm hex head wrench)
Cut-out dimensions:
423 x 214 mm
16.65 x 8.43 inch
Fig. 410: Cut-out dimensions for the fixed desk mounted GCP1
D Before being mounted into a desk, the GCP1 has to be opened. For this purpose loosen the locking screw of the panel with a 3 mm hex head wrench. This
tool is part of the accessory set.
D Cut-out the opening in the desk.
Cut-out dimensions: 423 x 214 mm / 16.65 x 8.43 inch
D Set the opened GCP1 panel into the desk cut-out. Fasten the panel with four
4mm countersunk wood screws. For this purpose, the frame is provided with
four screw holes. The length of the screw depends on the thickness of the desk
plate. The wood screws will not be delivered.
Note:
Before fastening the panel make sure that the ventilation holes of the
panel are not covered by the thickness of the desk plate. The ventilation
of the panel must not be impeded in order to ensure sufficient cooling of
the device and to guarantee an interference-free operation of the GCP1.
Should the thickness of the plate be more than 10 mm, the underside of
the desk plate has to be bevelled in the area of the ventilation holes (see
Fig.412).
D Connect the cables into the corresponding plugs of the panel.
D The PE terminal on rear of the GCP1 panel (see Fig. ... ) can be connected to
a central earth system to prevent or eliminate EMC interferences.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-15
4. Installation
STE-B1
TK
TK
Ctrl
5 Rack Units
220 mm
8.66 inch
Prev
top view
Jog
?
Var
Step
Step
Play
446 mm
Shtl
Stop
Play
17.56 inch
rear side
16.58 inch
2.38 inch
60.34 mm
0.84 inch
21.21 mm
421 mm
left side
212 mm
8.35 inch
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
PE
AC Power in
J6
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
100 – 240 V ; 0,4 A ; 50/60 Hz
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
Caution :
For continued protection against fire, replace
Listed
R
Prof. Vid. Equipm.
3S13
R
N4067
Serial port 2 J2
RS 232
Serial port 1 J1
RS 485
RS 232
USB J4
RS 485
Caution: See installation manual before
connecting to the supply.
Com2 J3
LAN J5
Attention: Lisez le manuel avant
l’installation d’alimentation.
Vorsicht: Vor Anschluß an das Netz
Caution:
Two–pole (Neutral wire fuse) !
Attention:
Caution: Do not remove any cover. Risk of electrical shock. High current level.
Fusible bipolaire (Neutre inclu) !
No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
Achtung:
Attention: Ne pas enlever cette plaque. Tension dangereuse. Prière de
s’adressera au personnal qualifié.
Achtung: Abdeckung nicht entfernen. Gefährliche Spannungen. Hohe
434 mm
17.09 inch
443 mm
17.44 inch
130 mm 5.12 inch
Screw holes for
desk fixing
ground view
Fig. 411: Mechanical dimensions of the GCP1
4-16
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
front side of the GCP1
0.51 inch
4. Installation
13 mm
STE-B1
bevelled edge
of desk plate
0.39 inch
rear side
1.58 inch
left side of the GCP1
40 mm
10 mm
ventilation holes
front side
bevelled edge
of desk plate
ventilation holes
ventilation holes
Fig. 412: Ventilation holes of the GCP1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-17
4. Installation
4.9.1.2
STE-B1
Desk Mounting with Swivel Frame
fastening screws:
panel to
swivel frame
(3mm countersunk)
below front plate
unlocking lever
for swivel frame
inside screw
panel locking
(3mm hex head wrench)
washer
locking block
nut
screw holes
Cut-out dimensions:
449 x 238 mm
17.68 x 9.37 inch
Fig. 413: Cut-out dimensions for the GCP1 with desk mounting swivel frame
D The swivel frame with mounted desk locking blocks and the GCP1 panel will
be delivered separately.
D Cut-out the opening in the desk.
Cut-out dimensions: 449 x 238 mm / 17.68 x 9.37 inch
D Swing out the swivel frame by pressing the unlocking levers and disassemble
the four desk locking blocks.
D Set the swivel frame into the desk opening and fasten the four desk locking
blocks below the desk plate in one of the three screw holes, depending on the
thickness of the desk plate.
Note:
Before fastening the swivel frame make sure that the ventilation holes of
the housing are not covered by the thickness of the desk plate. The ventilation of the housing must not be impeded in order to ensure sufficient
cooling of the device and to guarantee an interference-free operation of
the GCP1.
Should the thickness of the plate be more than 35 mm, the underside of
the desk plate has to be bevelled in the area of the ventilation holes.
4-18
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
D Insert the GCP1 panel into the swung on swivel frame and open the panel by
loosen the locking screw of the panel.
D Fasten the panel to the swivel frame with the four 3 mm countersunk cross head
screws; close and lock the panel.
D Swing out the GCP1 panel (with swivel frame), lead the cables from the cable
feed-through via a loop to the corresponding plugs of the panel and fasten them
with the cable traction relief (see Fig. 414).
The cable loop should have a diameter of approx. 6 inch / 150 mm.
D The earth wire from the PE terminal of the swivel frame (see Fig. 414) has to
be connected to the PE terminal on rear of the GCP1 panel (see Fig. ... ).
This PE terminal can be connected to a central earth system to prevent or eliminate EMC interferences.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-19
105,1 mm
4.14 inch
cable feed-through
cable traction relief
PE terminal
256 mm
18.40 inch
rear side
cable feed-through
447,4 mm
top view
into
swivel frame
housing
cable loop
(diameter approx.
6 inch / 150 mm)
467,4 mm
left side
9.29 inch
10.08 inch
236 mm
2.61 inch
STE-B1
66,4 mm
4. Installation
17.61 inch
Fig. 414: Mechanical dimensions of GCP1 with desk mounting swivel frame
4-20
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
4.9.2
RACK MOUNTING
4.9.2.1
Fixed Rack Mounting
D For a fixed rack mounting of the GCP1 panel into a 19” cabinet
a height of 5 RU’s (222 mm / 8.75 inch) is required.
D Unlock the GCP1 panel with the 3 mm hex head wrench and open it.
D Fasten the rack mounting brackets to the frame of the GCP1.
(The brackets and panel fastening screws are part of the accessory set).
Note:
Before being mounted into the rack, the GCP1 has to be
closed and locked with the 3 mm hex head wrench.
D Mount the prepared GCP1 panel into the rack.
The rack mount screws will not be delivered, because they are depending on
the different rack types.
D Connect the cables to the corresponding plugs of the panel.
D The PE terminal on rear of the GCP1 panel (see Fig. ... ) can be connected to
a central earth system to prevent or eliminate EMC interferences.
GCP1
panel
fastening
screw
panel
fastening
screw
panel
fastening screw
5 RU’s
screw holes
for rack mounting
panel
screw
rack mounting
bracket
rack
mounting
bracket
fastening
19” rack frame
Fig. 415: Fixed rack mounting of the GCP1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-21
4. Installation
4.9.2.2
STE-B1
Rack Mounting with Swivel Frame
D For a 19” rack mounting with swivel frame the GCP1 panel needs a
built-in height of 3 RU’s (134 mm / 5.24 inch) and a
height of 5 RU’s (222 mm / 8.75 inch) in swung-down (vertical) position.
D The components of the swivel frame will be delivered unmounted and separated from the GCP1 panel.
D The swivel frame has to be mounted into the rack first;
then the GCP1 panel can be installed.
D Rack mounting of the swivel frame:
Mount the left and right side traverse (assembled with telescope rail & swivel
mechanism) into the rack.
The rack mount screws will not be delivered, because they are depending on
the different rack types.
Mount the rear traverse to the left and right side traverse with the four 3 mm
countersunk cross head screws from above.
Mount the front traverse to the left and right telescope rail with the four 3 mm
countersunk cross head screws from below.
Pull out the left and right telescope rail by pressing the unlocking levers.
Mount the front plate of the swivel frame with four 3 mm countersunk cross
head screws at the left and right side.
D Installation of GCP1 panel:
Pull out the swivel frame and position it horizontal by pressing the unlocking
levers.
Insert the GCP1 panel into the swivel frame.
Loosen the panel locking screw with the 3 mm hex head wrench and open it.
Fasten the panel to the swivel frame with the four 3 mm countersunk cross head
screws.
D Lead the cables from the rear side of the rack through the cable holders via a
first loop (long enough to plug in and out the GCP) to the swivel frame.
Lead the cables within the swivel frame via a second loop (diameter approx.
6 inch / 150 mm) to the corresponding plugs of the panel and fasten them with
the cable traction relief (see Fig. 414).
D The earth wire from the PE terminal of the swivel frame (see Fig. 414) has to
be connected to the PE terminal on rear of the GCP1 panel (see Fig. ... ).
This PE terminal can be connected to a central earth system to prevent or eliminate EMC interferences.
4-22
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
fastening screws
front traverse
(3mm countersunk)
fastening screws
rear traverse
(3mm countersunk)
rear traverse
panel fastening screws
(3mm countersunk)
below front plate
front traverse
cable holders
(below)
side traverse
with telescope rail
& swivel mechanism
front plate
(of swivel frame)
panel locking screw
(3mm hex head wrench)
swivel frame
unlocking lever
rack mount
screws
front plate
fastening
screws
(3mm
countersunk)
Fig. 416: Rack mounting of the GCP1 with swivel frame
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-23
4. Installation
4.9.3
STE-B1
CONNECTING TO THE SHADOW TELECINE
Attention: The EMC regulations require the use of properly shielded cables
in the installation of the device or the system. Suitable cables
can be ordered from Thomson.
For the control connection between the Shadow Telecine and the GCP1, the RJ45
patch cable, supplied with the GCP1 has to be connected from the rear RJ45 terminal panel of the Shadow to the LAN connector J5 of the GCP1.
Shadow
RJ45 Terminal Panel
RJ45 patch cable
RJ45 LAN, J5
AC IN
Fig. 417: Power and control connectors
The housing of the GCP1 panel is connected to protective earth (PE).
PE
The panel has a PE terminal on rear. This PE terminal can be connected to a central
earth system to prevent or eliminate EMC interferences.
4-24
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.10
4. Installation
CONNECTING OF AN EXTERNAL GATEBLAST AIR COMPRESSOR
Gateblast unit
An integrated gateblast unit, consisting of a pressure reducer, 3 m air filter and
magnetic valve, keeps the light gap and the integrations cylinder of the film gate
dustfree.
An external air compressor with the following features
D 2.5 ... 7.5 bar = 35 ... 107 lb /sq. inch
D Pre-filtered air (max 40 m)
D Dry air, less than 80 % relative air humidity
D Oil-free
and a high pressure hose is additionally required.
Connection of an external air compressor
Connect the external air compressor as follows (see figures 418 and 419):
D Connect an 1/4 inch (8 mm) air hose to the appropriate air connector
(figure 418) at the cabinet rear bottom left hand side.
Attention!
Use only high pressure hose > 7.5 bar = 107 lb /sq. inch.
D Secure air hose with a circular clip on the connector (figure 418)
D Adapt air hose to the air compressor (figure 418)
D Check the correct air pressure 0.6 bar or 8 lb / sq. inch (nominal value with
pressure reducer in the air hose) of the pressure reducer figure 419 when the
telecine is in PLAY mode.
If the telecine is in STOP, switched off or when mains failure occurs, the magnetic
valve of the gateblast unit switches off the air supply.
The required air flow amounts to 60 l / min.
Attention!
Check your compressor regulary!
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-25
4. Installation
STE-B1
Open with a screw driver
Air Hose Connector
3 149 300 000
for 8 mm air hose
Air Compressor
External air compressor:
D
D
D
D
D
2.5 ... 7.5 bar
(35 – 107 lb/sq. in.)
Pre-filtered air (max. 40 m)
Dry air, less than 80%
relative air humidity
Required air quantity 60 l / min
Oil-free
Fig. 418: Rear side of the telecine unit with air connector terminal panel
4-26
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
Pressure reducer
Air pressure:
0.6 bar (8 lb/sq. inch)
Magnetic valve
Air filter 3 m
with water collector
Air filter is included in the
Filter & Battery Set
2 128 102 142
Fig. 419: Gateblast unit of the Shadow Telecine
Attention!
Change the air filter and empty the water collector regulary!
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-27
4. Installation
4-28
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.11
4. Installation
MOUNTING LENSES AND FILTERS
Before switching-on the telecine, various condensor lenses and filters has to be
mounted in the lamp house of the unit. The projection lamp is already mounted.
Filter wheel
4 Filter elements
Projection lamp
Fig. 420: Lamp house with complete mounted filters
To install lenses and filters open the rear doors of the telecine unit.
The carriers for lenses and filters are accessible from the cabinet rear and located
approximately at the middle of the film deck plate.
To protect the optical elements against dirt and finger prints while inserting,
always wear thin cotton gloves or use a piece of optical cleaning cloth to
grasp them.
The lenses and filters had been packed in clean condition. In exceptional case, if
necessary, clean the parts with optical cleaning cloth, order no.: 5 001 310 280,
that has been moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-29
4. Installation
4.11.1
STE-B1
INSERT FOUR DICHROIC FILTERS INTO THE FILTER WHEEL
D Release the filter wheel by pushing down the motor.
D Revolve the filter wheel that a filter opening stands upside.
D Move the two fastening brackets of the filter to the side.
Note the mounting position notation at the filter opening and at the dichroic filter
(noted at one small edge): NEG, PT/IMED or CAL or the filter order numbers.
D Insert the respective filter.
D The fastening brackets have to lock in by turnig.
1015604610
1015604610
Balance ring
PT / IMED
NEG
PT / IMED filter
POS
SPARE
NEG filter
CAL
Balance ring
CAL filter
Push down
for releasing
the wheel!
Filter wheel motor
Order number
Fastening
bracket
Fastening
bracket
Fig. 421: Insertion of the filter into the filter wheel
4-30
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.11.2
4. Installation
INSERT FOUR FILTER ELEMENTS
After unpacking, clean the filter or lens elements and mount them at their respective
positions before or behind the filter wheel (Fig. 422).
To avoid mounting the elements at a wrong place, the base plate is provided with
encoding pins (Fig. 423). The filter elements have corresponding grooves. Thus,
wrong mounting is not possible.
Fasten each element with two M4 screws using a 2mm hex socket-head wrench.
1
2
3
4
1
Heat absorbing filter
2
Condensor lens 2
3
Infrared filter
4
Condensor lens 1
Fig. 422: Mounting the four filter elements
Heat absorbing filter
Condensor lens 2
Infrared filter
Condensor lens 1
Halogen lamp
Slot coding
Fig. 423: Slot coding
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-31
4. Installation
STE-B1
Fig. 424: Mounted filter elements
4-32
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.12
4. Installation
INSTALLING LENS GATE ASSEMBLY (LGA)
Installing the appropriate LGA (16mm or 35mm) matches the telecine to the respective film format optically.
1. Turn the locking lever to the unlocked position.
2. Grasp the LGA by the two handles and set the unit on the guide pins and slide
it slowly towards the film deck plate until it fits.
Attention!
Do not cant the lens gate assembly while sliding it in to avoid damaging
the light sensor!
3. Lock the lever .
Guide pin
Lens Gate Assembly
LGA
Locked
Locking lever
Unlocked
Fig. 425: Installing the Lens Gate Assembly
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-33
4. Installation
STE-B1
Insert the Effect filter
Guide rail
for Effect filters
Fig. 426: Inserting the Effect filters
4-34
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
4.13
MAINS CONNECTION GENERAL
4.13.1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Mains installation must only be done by qualified personnel!
Power supply in excess of 40 volts are potentially hazards or lethal.
At no time should contact be made with the machine wiring or terminals, except via
a probe with appropriate insulating properties.
Opening covers or removing assemblies except for those which can be actuated
by hand (without using tools) may give access to live components or parts. Therefore, disconnect the Shadow Telecine from the AC power before beginning any repair works or before exchanging any parts.
CAUTION !
Disconnect power cord
before removing covers!
Parts of this unit are still at
mains voltage in ”OFF”-condition!
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel!
Capacitors may still carry a residual charge!
In cases it is unavoidable to carry out repair works on the telecine unit while it is
powered, this should be done only by qualified personnel being informed about the
dangers involved, and only after having taken the necessary preventive measures.
If it can be taken for granted that due to a damage, safe operation of the telecine
unit is no longer possible, put the unit out of operation and make sure that it cannot
be switched on again.
Plug-in units
For safety reasons, all plug-in units should only be operated in the built-in condition.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-35
4. Installation
4.13.2
STE-B1
GENERAL REMARKS CONCERNING COMMISSIONING AND AC POWER SUPPLY
The Shadow Telecine and the several units are constructed in conformity with the
VDE safety regulations EN 60950 (VDE 0805), protection class 1 and UL 1419 and
are in unobjectionable condition when leaving the factory.
In order to maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, the following points
have to be observed:
Mains voltage
check
The telecine unit is delivered for operation on the required mains voltage. This voltage is marked on the type label at the rear of the cabinet and should be checked
against the actual studio mains voltage before switching on the equipment.
TYPE
PART/SER.NO.
POWER AC
STE B1
000 128 580 000 / 099
3W+N+PE
230/400 V: 6A, 6A10A
120/208 V: 11A , 13A , 19A
1W+N+PE
FREQUENCY
–
/200 V: 23A
–
/230 V: 20A
–
/240 V: 19A
N4067
47 – 63 Hz
This device complies with part15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This devise may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Fig. 427: Type label of Shadow Telecine
3-phase mains connection
3 * 400V, 50Hz, three-phase current, 230V mains
3 * 208V, 60Hz, three-phase current, 120V mains
Class 1 wiring applicable
1-phase mains connection
1 * 230V, 50Hz, one-phase current, 230V mains
2-phase mains connection
phase to phase 208V, 60Hz, 120V mains
Power consumption
approx. 5 kVA
Earthing
wiring regulations according to VDE 0800/part 2,
VDE 100/part 540,
IEC 364–5–54, IEC 364–4–41, NEC Code ANSI/NFPA
or the applicable national regulations.
Fuses
4-36
When changing fuses, it is mandatory to use only UL-fuse links of same type and
current rating as a replacement. Using mended fuses or shorting the fuse holder
is not permissible.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Mains voltage
change
4. Installation
When connecting this telecine unit to another mains voltage, the fuses in the subunits have to be checked or exchanged. For details see chapter 4.15 .
Opening covers or removing assemblies except for those which can be actuated
by hand (without using tools) may give access to live components or parts. Therefore, disconnect the telecine from the AC power before beginning any repair works
or before exchanging any parts.
Ventilation
For ventilating the telecine cabinet, four blower units are mounted in different
plane surfaces. When installing the Shadow Telecine, care should be taken to allow
for adequate aircirculation.
In addition, several subunits are equipped with their own blowers.
For the blowers no change of the supply voltage has to be executed.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-37
4. Installation
4.13.3
STE-B1
EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
Earthing instructions:
1. Earthing with the protective earth has to be executed with the power cord
which contains the earthed protective conductor PE (normally).
The earth conductor has to be connected to the PE screw terminal
within the line filter!
PE
TE
2. The additional protective earth has to be connected to the central PE
screw at the power terminal unit as earth conductor with large cross
section!
3. The jumper TE –– PE must not be broken!
4. The earth connection has to be made before connecting the power cord!
CAUTION!
GROUNDING CIRCUIT CONTINUITY IS VITAL FOR
SAVE OPERATION OF MACHINE. NEVER OPERATE MACHINE
WITH GROUNDING CONDUCTOR DISCONNECTED
ATTENTION!
UN CIRCUIT DE TERRE CONTINU EST ESSENTIEL
EN VUE DU FONCTIONNEMENT SECURITAIRE DE L’APPAREIL.
NE JAMAIS METRE L’APPAREIL EN MARCHE LORSQUE LE CONDUCTEUR DE MISE A LA TERRE EST DEBRANCHE
Protective earthing
Earthing of the telecine unit serves the product safety and meets the requirements
in conformity with safety class I.
The Shadow Telecine is connected with the protective earth of the power supply
circuit (e.g. the studio) by means of the power cord which also contains the earthed
protective conductor PE (see also chapters 4.13.6 ”Required cross sections for the
power cords” and 4.14 ”Installation of the power cord”).
Precondition is an earthed and checked mains connection!
The protective earth conductor of the power cord always has to be connected to
the PE screw terminal within the line filter. This PE screw terminal is internally connected with the parts to be earthed, e.g. the cases.
The effect of the protective earth connection must not be cancelled through the use
of an extension cord without protective earth conductor, through an excessively
long cable, nor must its function be disabled in any other way!
High Leakage Current
Due to its high leakage current ( > 3.5mA), the telecine unit must be connected with
an additional earth conductor of 6mm2.
Additional
Earth Conductor
UL 1419
An insulated earthing conductor that is identical in size, insulation material, and
thickness to the earthed and unearthed branch circuit supply conductors except
that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part
of the branch circuit that supplies the unit or system.
For more details see chapter ”Required cross sections for the mains / earth cables”.
Make the earth connection with the additional earth conductor to the central PE
screw at the power terminal unit always before applying mains power!
4-38
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
For this purpose, the line filter also carries the following warning note:
CAUTION !
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
Connecting to
Service Equipment
UL 1419
The earthing conductor described is to be connected to earth at the service equipment or, if supplied by a separately derived system, at the supply transformer or
motor generator set.
Earthed
Plug Receptacles
UL 1419
The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the unit or system have all to be
of an earthing type, and the earthing conductors serving these receptacles are to
be connected to earth at the service equipment.
PE
The telecine unit is provided with two separate terminals for connecting protective
earth PE and technical earth TE (e.g. video earth) at the power terminal unit.
TE On delivery, these terminals are joined by a short-circuit jumper.
The jumper TE –– PE must not be broken!
For using the TE terminal it is necessary to consult Thomson.
The PE terminal, marked by the symbol
417-IEC-5017 (protective earth), is
internally connected with the PE terminal of the line filter and the metal case parts.
TN-C power systems
In case of TN-C power systems (combination of neutral conductor and protective
conductor), it is necessary to observe the regulations in conformity with IEC
364-5-54 (VDE 0100 T.540) and IEC 364-4-41, IEC 364-4-47 (VDE 0100 T.410) or
the applicable national regulations.
Any break of the protective earth conductor inside or outside the telecine or
disconnection of the protective conductor connector may entail that, in the
event of a failure, the operational safety of the device will no longer be ensured!
All mains sockets of devices being interconnected with signal cables have
to be checked. The protective earth conductors must not be live!
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-39
4. Installation
STE-B1
Abbreviations: (In conformity with DIN 42 400 or IEC Publication 445)
4-40
FPE
L
N
PE
=
=
=
=
TE
=
IEC
VDE
DIN
UL
=
=
=
=
functional protective earth
line, outer conductor (phase, R, S, T)
neutral conductor
protective earth conductor
(earlier designation: PROTECT GND)
color code of the PE wire: green/yellow
technical earth = functional noiseless earth
(video earth, audio earth with protective earth qualities
color code of the TE wire: black
International Electrotechnical Commission
Association of German electrical technicians and electrical engineers
German industrial standards
Underwriters Laboratories
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.13.4
4. Installation
MAINS SYSTEMS (POWER TYPES)
4.13.4.1 Mains System from Europe and USA
(L 1) U
230 (120)V
398 (208)V
N
230 (120)V
(L 3) W
230 (120)V
(L 2) V
PE
Three-phase current, star connection, four-wire, earthed neutral
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-41
4. Installation
STE-B1
4.13.4.2 Mains System from USA and South-East (Asia, Japan)
Three-phase current, delta connection, four-wire, earthed midpoint of phase;
= two-phase connection 240Vac; N is not connected to the telecine.
L1
120V
(N)
240V
120V
L2
PE
Three-phase current, open delta connection, four-wire, earthed midpoint of phase;
= two-phase connection 240V (200V); N is not connected to the telecine.
L1
120V
(N)
240V
120V
L2
PE
Single-phase (two-phase) current, three-wire, earthed midpoint;
N is not connected to the telecine.
L1
120V
(N)
240V
120 V
L2
PE
4-42
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.13.5
4. Installation
AN EASY WAY TO FIND OUT THE TYPE OF POWER SYSTEM
When you need to determine the type of power you have in a plant, use the following simple procedure:
1. Label each wire with an identification tag, i.e. A, B, C, etc. This is especially
helpful when all wires are of the same color.
2. Jot down the total number of combinations you can derive from the wires you
have, e.g.:
3 wires will have 3 combinations,
4 wires will have 6 combinations,
5 wires will have 10 combinations.
Example:
4 wires labeled A, B, C, D equals 6 possible combinations:
A to B, A to C, A to D,
B to C, B to D,
C to D.
3. Using your multimeter, measure the voltages between all the wire combinations. Note the voltages.
4. The lower voltages are the mains voltages whereas the higher voltages are
the phase voltages. This procedure can be used for any power system, regardless whether it is an Edison, a wye (star), delta (mesh) or a crazy leg delta.
Let’s apply this procedure to get a better understanding of the three basic
power systems.
4.13.5.1 Edison System, 120/240V AC, Single-phase, 3-wire
A
120V
B
240V
120V
C
PE
Single-phase (two-phase) current, three-wire, earthed midpoint
There are 3 wires, therefore there are 3 combinations.
Example:
A to B = 120Vac mains voltage,
A to C = 240Vac phase voltage,
B to C = 120Vac mains voltage.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-43
4. Installation
STE-B1
4.13.5.2 Wye (star) System, 120/208V AC or 230/398V AC, Three-phase, 4-wire
A
Mains voltage
118V
206V
Phase voltage
Mains voltage
116V
C
D
209V
Phase voltage
210V
Phase voltage
Mains voltage
120V
B
PE
Three-phase current, star connection, four-wire, earthed neutral
There are 4 wires, therefore there are 6 combinations.
Example:
A to B = 210Vac,
A to C = 206Vac,
A to D = 118Vac,
B to C = 209Vac,
B to D = 120Vac,
C to D = 116Vac.
The illustration shows the symmetry of the configuration. The characteristics of this
system are:
– the phase voltages A to B, B to C and A to C are all within 10% of each other,
– the mains voltages A to D, B to D and C to D are all within 10% of each other,
– the phase voltage is 1.73 times the mains voltage,
– the loads in the system account for the slight differences among the mains
voltages and the phase voltages
4-44
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
4.13.5.3 Delta (Mesh) System, 240V AC or 398V AC, Three-phase, 3-wire
A
240V
Phase voltage
238V
Phase voltage
C
B
241V
Phase voltage
PE
Three-phase current, delta connection, 3-wire, 240Vac or 398Vac;
There are 3 wires, therefore there are 4 combinations.
Example:
A to B = 238Vac,
A to C = 240Vac,
B to C = 241Vac.
The characteristics of the delta system are:
– there is no neutral so there are no mains voltages,
– the phase voltages A to B, A to C and B to C are within 10% of each other.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-45
4. Installation
STE-B1
4.13.5.4 Wild Leg (crazy leg) Delta System, 120/240V AC, Three-phase, 4-wire
A
240V
Phase voltage
238V
Phase voltage
D
C
B
241V
Phase voltage
PE
Three-phase current, wild leg delta connection, 4-wire,
120/240Vac, earthed midpoint of phase;
There are 4 wires, therefore there are 6 combinations.
Example:
A to B = 238Vac,
A to C = 240Vac,
A to D = 119Vac,
B to C = 240Vac,
B to D = 119Vac,
C to D = 208Vac.
Occasionally, you will find a delta system in which one phase is center tapped and
grounded. This is called a wild leg delta. It produces two mains voltages which are
each equal to half of the phase voltage.
Example:
A to D = 120Vac mains voltage,
A to C = 120Vac mains voltage,
A to B = 240Vac phase voltage.
The voltage between C and D in the wild leg delta system is usually not within the
specifications for our equipment. Use the following formula to determine the C or
D voltage:
Phase voltage divided by 2, multiplied with 1.73
In our example:
240Vac : 2 * 1.73 = 208Vac
This voltage can vary significantly if the phase voltage is less than 240Vac or if there
are unbalanced loads on the delta system.
If the equipment which you are installing requires three-phase power, the customer
must correct the system before the equipment can operate.
If the equipment requires only single-phase power, you can install the equipment
but be sure to use one of the wires with the correct voltage.
4-46
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.13.6
4. Installation
REQUIRED EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER AND
CROSS SECTIONS FOR THE MAINS / EARTH CABLES
Mains System
Europe
USA
Japan
Cross Section
Cable Type
Circuit Breaker
Wall Outlet
3 Ph+N+PE
230/400V
5 x 6mm@
H07RNF5G6.0
223-25K ABB-Stotz
1Ph+N+PE
230V
3 Ph+N+PE
120/208V
3 x 6 mm@
H07RNF3G6.0
222-32K ABB-Stotz
AWG 10/5x
SO 600V
223-25K ABB-Stotz *
Ph + Ph + PE
208V
AWG 8/3x
SO 600V
222-32K ABB-Stotz
3 Ph+N+PE
100/200V
AWG 10/5x
SO 600V
223-25K AB-Stotz *
Ph + Ph + PE
200V
AWG 8/3x
SO 600V
222-32K ABB-Stotz
*see NEC Code 1993 240-4 Exception No.1
Manufacturer for circuit breaker:
ABB-Stotz-Kontakt GmbH
D-69123 Heidelberg
Eppelheimer Str. 82
Tel: 06221 / 701 748
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-47
4. Installation
STE-B1
4.14
INSTALLATION OF THE POWER CORD
4.14.1
LOCATION OF MAINS TERMINAL UNIT FH 4030, FH 4032, FH 4033
The mains terminal, the line filter and the central earth screw are located between
Rack 2 and Rack 3 in the rear of the cabinet.
Connection Unit Rack 1
EXTERN
EXTERN
Mains
Terminal
FH 4030
FH 4032
FH 4033
Line Filter
Connection Unit Rack 3
Mains terminal unit
Connection Unit Rack 2
Central earth screw
Fig. 428: Shadow Telecine, rear view
4-48
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.14.2
4. Installation
THREE-PHASE POWER TERMINAL UNIT FH 4030
Three-phase voltage has to be connected via a power cord to the line filter in the
power terminal unit (FH 4030) from the rear of the telecine cabinet:
Remove the lower case at the rear side of the power terminal unit (4 hex screws).
Open the cover plate of the line filter (6 screws).
Pass the insulated power cord, provided with multicore cable ends, through the
cable tube of the cabinet and of the line filter.
Terminate the cable ends at the input connecting block of the line filter as follows:
Protective earth
PE
(PE has to be terminated at first!)
Neutral
N
to
PE( IN )
to
N
Phase
L1 (U)
to
Phase
L2 (V)
to
Phase
L3 (W)
to
(The arrangement of the phases is optional)
(IN)
L1 (IN)
L2 (IN)
L3 (IN)
Fasten the strain relief of the cable tube and reinstall the cover plate of the line filter
and the housing of the power terminal unit.
For more details see circuit diagram 1-12840-30-SP (FH 4030).
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
3W+N+PE
230/400 V: 6A, 6A, 10A,; 47 - 63 Hz
120/208 V: 11A, 13A, 19A; 47 - 63 Hz
N4067
L1
L2
L3
N
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
connecting block
3-phase line filter
cable tube
strain relief
(part of power terminal unit FH 4030)
CAUTION !
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
power
cord
ÉÉÉÉÉ
cable tube
strain relief
ÉÉÉ
ACHTUNG !
HOHER ABLEITSTROM
Vor Inbetriebnahme
Erdungsverbindung herstellen
(on top of case)
Fig. 429: 3-phase line filter, with removed cover plate (FH 4030), top view
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-49
4. Installation
4.14.3
STE-B1
SINGLE-PHASE POWER TERMINAL UNIT FH 4032, OPTION
The phase-to-neutral voltage must have a value of about 230V.
Note:
120V mains operation is not possible!
Single-phase voltage has to be connected via a power cord to the line filter within
the power terminal unit (FH 4032) from the rear of the telecine cabinet:
Remove the cover plate of the connecting block (4 screws).
Terminate the cable ends at the input connecting block of the line filter as follows:
Protective earth PE
(PE has to be terminated at first!)
to
PE IN
Phase
Neutral
to
to
L1 IN
L2 IN
L1
N
Fasten the strain relief and the cover plate of the connecting block.
For more details see circuit diagram 1–12840–32–SP (FH 4032)
Single-phase line filter
(part of Mains Terminal Unit FH 4032)
connecting block
L
E
N
L1 IN
PE IN
L2 IN
(on case of line filter)
strain relief
230 V only!
1W+N+PE
power
cord
200V / 23A
CAUTION !
230V / 20A
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
240V / 19A
ACHTUNG !
HOHER ABLEITSTROM
Vor Inbetriebnahme
Erdungsverbindung herstellen
Fig. 430: Single-phase line filter (FH 4032), top view
4-50
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.14.4
4. Installation
TWO-PHASE POWER TERMINAL UNIT FH 4033, OPTION
The phase-to-phase voltage must have a value of about 208V.
Note:
120V mains operation is not possible!
Two-phase voltage has to be connected via a power cord to the line filter within the
power terminal unit (FH 4033) from the rear of the telecine cabinet:
Remove the cover plate of the connecting block (4 screws).
Terminate the cable ends at the input connecting block of the line filter as follows:
Protective earth PE
to
(PE has to be terminated at first!)
PE IN
Phase
Phase
L1 IN
L2 IN
L1
L2
to
to
Fasten the strain relief and the cover plate of the connecting block.
For more details see circuit diagram 1–12840–32–SP (FH 4033)
Two-phase line filter
(part of Mains Terminal Unit FH 4033)
connecting block
L1
L1 IN
E
L2
PE IN
L2 IN
(on case of line filter)
strain relief
208 V only!
2W+PE
208V / 22A; 47 - 63 Hz
power
cord
CAUTION !
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
ACHTUNG !
HOHER ABLEITSTROM
Vor Inbetriebnahme
Erdungsverbindung herstellen
Fig. 431: Two-phase line filter (FH 4033), top view
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-51
4. Installation
STE-B1
4.15
MAINS FUSES
4.15.1
POWER TERMINAL UNIT 1-PHASE FH 4032
The mains fuses set FH 4062 for the subunits is contained in the respective power
terminal unit FH 4032. The dimensions of the fuses are 5
20mm.
The current ratings are written on the mounting plate beside the fuse holders for
230V as shown below:
CAUTION !
Mains Terminal Unit
FH 4032
Fuses > 10A T/125V
Fuses v 10A T/250V
230V
T1
T2
AC Subunits
PS 3.1
6.3A
J1
J7
J6
T8
2A
6.3A
2A
1.6A
HUB
J10
T11
AUX 1
J11
PS 1.1
J8
T10
T9
HD Serializer
J9
PS 1.2
6.3A
T7
AUX 3
J4
T6
4A
J5
VS 4
4A
T5
Spooling Servo
J2
T4
0.8A
AC Subunits
PS 3.2
6.3A
T3
Capstan Servo
J3
For continued protection
against risk of fire, replace
only with the same type and
rating of fuse!
Cabinet Power Rem
J12
2A
T12
PS 2.2
J13
6.3A
T14
T13
PS 2.1
J14
6.3A
Mains System
Service AC out
3-Phase 120V/208V 120V/2.5A max
3-Phase 230V/400V 230V/2.5A max
1-Phase
230V 230V/2.5A max
2-Phase 120V/208V 240V/2.5A max
Fuses 2 * T2.5A/250V
47 – 63Hz
CAUTION !
Risk of electric T16
shock. Grounded J36
circuit conductor
(neutral) provided T17
with over-current
protection.
Test components
before touching!
Power Switch
2.5A
J15
CAUTION !
Disconnect power cord
before removing covers!
Parts of this unit are still at
mains voltage in ”OFF” - condition!
CAUTION !
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
AC IN: 100 – 240V
DC OUT: 12V / 1.3A
ACHTUNG !
SERVICE AC
OUT
Vor Entfernen der Abdeckungen
Netzanschluß unterbrechen!
Auch bei ”Power Off” führen Teile
dieses Gerätes Netzspannung!
Fig. 432: Power terminal unit FH 4032
4-52
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.15.2
4. Installation
POWER TERMINAL UNIT 2-PHASE FH 4033
The mains fuses set FH 4063 for the subunits is contained in the power terminal
unit FH 4033. The dimensions of the fuses are 6.3
32mm.
The current ratings are written on the mounting plate beside the fuse holders for
208V as shown below:
CAUTION !
Mains Terminal Unit
FH 4033
For continued protection
against risk of fire, replace
only with the same type and
rating of fuse!
Fuses > 10A T/125V
Fuses v 10A T/250V
T1
T2
208V
AC Subunits
PS 3.1
J1
10A
10A
1.2A
5A
5A
10A
T3
Capstan Servo
J3
J5
J7
J9
J8
T10
3.2A
J11
HUB
J10
2.5A
T11
AUX 1
PS 1.1
10A
T9
HD Serializer
PS 1.2
J6
T8
3.2A
VS 4
J4
T6
T7
AUX 3
PS 3.2
J2
T4
T5
Spooling Servo
AC Subunits
Cabinet Power Rem
J12
3.2A
T12
PS 2.2
J13
10A
T14
T13
PS 2.1
J14
10A
Mains System
Service AC out
3-Phase 120V/208V
3-Phase 230V/400V
1-Phase
230V
2-Phase 120V/208V
47 – 63Hz
120V/2.5A max
230V/2.5A max
230V/2.5A max
240V/2.5A max
Power Switch
J15
3.2A
CAUTION !
Disconnect power cord
before removing covers!
Parts of this unit are still at
mains voltage in ”OFF” - condition!
CAUTION !
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
Fuses 2 * T2.5A/250V
CAUTION !
Risk of electric T16
shock. Grounded
circuit conductor J36
(neutral) provided T17
with over-current
protection.
SERVICE AC OUT
Test components
before touching!
AC IN: 100 – 240V
DC OUT: 12V / 1.3A
ACHTUNG !
Vor Entfernen der Abdeckungen
Netzanschluß unterbrechen!
Auch bei ”Power Off” führen Teile
dieses Gerätes Netzspannung!
Fig. 433: Power terminal unit FH 4033
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-53
4. Installation
4.15.3
STE-B1
POWER TERMINAL UNIT 3-PHASE FH 4030
The mains fuses set FH 4061 (120/208V) or FH 4062 (230/400V) for the subunits
is contained in the power terminal unit FH 4030. The dimensions of the fuses are
6.3
32mm (FH 4061) or 5 x 20mm (FH 4062).
The current ratings are written on the mounting plate beside the fuse holders for
120V and 230V as shown below:
CAUTION !
Mains Terminal Unit
FH 4030
For continued protection
against risk of fire, replace
only with the same type and
rating of fuse!
Fuses < 10A T/250V
Fuses > 10A T/125V
T1
T2
120V
AC Subunits
PS 3.1
15A
6.3A
15A
6.3A
J1
230V
T3
Capstan Servo
J3
2.5A
0.8A
10A
3.15A
15A
6.3A
4A
1.25A
15A
6.3A
HUB
J10
15A
6.3A
T11
AUX 1
J11
PS 1.1
J8
T10
10A
6.3A
J9
PS 1.2
J6
T8
T9
HD Serializer
VS 4
J4
T6
T7
AUX 3
J7
J2
T4
2.5A
0.8A
T5
Spooling Servo
J5
AC Subunits
PS 3.2
Cabinet Power Rem
J12
4A
2A
T12
PS 2.2
J13
12A
6.3A
T14
T13
PS 2.1
J14
15A
6.3A
Mains System
Service AC out
3-Phase 120V/208V 120V/2.5A max
3-Phase 230V/400V 230V/2.5A max
2-Phase 120V/240V 240V/2.5A max
1-Phase
230V 230V/2.5A max
47 – 63Hz
Fuses 2 * T2.5A/250V
CAUTION !
Risk of electric
shock. Grounded
circuit conductor
(neutral) provided
with over-current
protection.
Test components
before touching!
Power Switch
3.2A
2.5A
J15
CAUTION !
Disconnect power cord
before removing covers!
Parts of this unit are still at
mains voltage in ”OFF” - condition!
CAUTION !
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
AC IN: 100 – 240V
T16
T17
J36
SERVICE AC
OUT
DC OUT: 12V / 1.3A
ACHTUNG !
Vor Entfernen der Abdeckungen
Netzanschluß unterbrechen!
Auch bei ”Power Off” führen Teile
dieses Gerätes Netzspannung!
Fig. 434: Power terminal unit FH 4030
4-54
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4. Installation
Attention:
When changing fuses, it is mandatory to use only high-breaking fuses links
of same type and current rating as a replacement. Using mended fuses or
shorting the fuse holder is not permissible.
For more details see circuit diagram 1–12840–30–SP sheet 2
CAUTION !
For continued protection
against risk of fire, replace
only with the same type and
rating of fuse !
Attention:
After having switched over to another mains voltage, make sure that the corresponding fuses are inserted. For this purpose, see the indicated fuse ratings on the front panels of the units or subunits.
The subunits also contain fuses which have to be changed!
(see chapter ”Mains connection of subunits and mains voltage change”)
Overview fuses sets
Fuse
no.
AC Subunit
Fuses set FH 4061
Fuses set FH 4062
Fuses set FH 4063
3 phase (UL version)
Mains system 120V / 208V
UL 248.14
6.3 x 32 mm
1 or 3 phase
Mains system 230V
Mains system 230V / 400V
IEC 127
5 x 20 mm
2 phase (UL version)
Mains system 208V
UL 248.14
6.3 x 32 mm
T1
Power Supply 3.1
T 15A
T 6.3A
T 10
T2
Power Supply 3.2
T 15A
T 6.3A
T 10
T3
Capstan Power Stage
T 2.5A
T 0.8A
T 1.2
T4
VS 4
T 2.5A
T 4A
T5
T5
Spooling Power Stage
T 10A
T 4A
T5
T6
Power Supply 1.2
T 15A
T 6.3A
T 10
T7
Aux 3
T 4A
T 2A
T 3.2
T8
Power Supply 1.1
T 15A
T 6.3A
T 10
T9
HD Serializer
T 10A
T 2A
T 3.2
T10
Hub
T 15A
T 1.6A
T 2.5
T11
Aux 1
T 4A
T 2A
T 3.2
T12
Power Supply 2.2
T 12A
T 6.3A
T 10
T13
Power Supply 2.1
T 15A
T 6.3A
T 10
T14
Power Switch
T 3.2A
T 2.5A
T 3.2
T16
Service AC Out socket
T 2.5A
T 2.5A
T 2.5
T17
Service AC Out socket
T 2.5A
T 2.5A
T 2.5
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-55
4. Installation
4.16
STE-B1
LOCATION OF POWER SUPPLY UNITS OF RACKS 1-3
FH 4130
FH 4140
access
from
the rear side
FH 6430
FH 6340
FH 6231
FH 6340
access
from
the front side
FH 4140
FH 6430
FH 6340
Mains
Terminal
Unit:
FH 6234
FH 6340
3 Phase
FH 4030
or
2 Phase
FH 4033
or
1 Phase
FH 4032
Fig. 435: Shadow – Front view
4-56
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.16.1
4. Installation
REMOVAL OF POWER SUPPLY UNITS OF RACK 1
Switch off the telecine unit, open the rear doors and disconnect it from mains by
switching off the circuit breaker at the Power Terminal Unit (3 Phase) FH 4030 or
(2 Phase) FH 4033 or (1 Phase) FH 4032!
For exchange or mains change of the power supply units of Rack 1, it is necessary
to remove them from the frame support Rack 1.
1. Disconnect the DC connection cables from the power supply units
(see fig. 436).
2. Unscrew the two fixing screws (right and left side) of the mounting plate of the
power supply units from below (see fig. 437).
3. Carefully pull the mounting plate with the power supply units and fans out of the
frame support by disconnecting the both mains cable (see fig. 437) from the
cable connector at the rear of the power units .
4. Unscrew the eight fixing screws on top of the unit for demounting the power
supply units (see fig. 438).
DC connection cables
Fig. 436: Power terminal panel of Rack 1
Fixing screw (left)
Mains cable
Fig. 437: Fixing screws of Power supply units in Rack 1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-57
4. Installation
STE-B1
8 fixing screws
Carefully pull the
mounting plate with
the power supply units
out of the frame
Power terminal panel FH 4131
Fig. 438: Power supply units of Rack 1, rear view
4-58
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
4.16.2
4. Installation
REMOVAL OF POWER SUPPLY UNITS OF RACK 2 and 3
Switch off the telecine unit, open the rear doors and disconnect it from mains by
switching off the circuit breaker at the Power Terminal Unit (3 Phase) FH 4030 or
(1 Phase) FH 4032 or (2 Phase) FH 4033!
For exchange or mains change (FH 6230, FH 6234, FH 6340) of the power supply
units of Rack 2-3, it is necessary to remove them from the frame support Rack 2-3,
as follows:
1. Open the front doors Rack 2-3.
2. Unscrew the two screws (see fig. 439) and remove the cover plate of the mains
connecting block.
3. Disconnect the mains cable from J9 to the appropriate Rack “Mate-n-Lok” connector.
4. Remove the plastic cap and unscrew the locking screw.
5. Pull the handle and remove the power supply unit from the frame support.
Fastening screws
Cover plate
J 10
J9
S1
S2
L1/N
L2
180–264VAC
–OR–
90–132VAC
with S1–S2
Jumper
Fastening screw with plastic cap
DO NOT
RUN W/O
EARTH
GROUND
HERE
Handle
Fig. 439: Power supply unit of Rack 2 and 3
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
4-59
4. Installation
4-60
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5. Connections
5.
CONNECTIONS TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
5.1
EMC TERMINAL PANEL WITH CABLE FEED-THROUGH
To avoid EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problems feed all connection cables
(except iMCS connections) through the Cable feed trough and contact the cable
shields to ground with the earthing clamps or the EMI gasket.
Differences in coax and audio cable diameters should be compensated by using
an EMI shielding Tape with conductive adhesive.
The iMCS (internal machine communication system) connections have to be
plugged onto the four RJ45 ports of the terminal panel, see chapter 5.6.
Cable feed through
RJ45 Terminal panel
Fig. 500: Shadow Telecine, rear view
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-1
5. Connections
STE-B1
Move down to fix the cable
Closing device
Feed through
control cables!
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
Closing device
Ground
the shield!
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
EMI gasket
Feed through
coax & audio
cables!
Fig. 501: Rear view of the cable feed through
5-2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.2
5. Connections
OVERVIEW CONNECTION UNITS RACK 1 - 3
Rack 1
Rack 3
Rack 2
Fig. 502: Shadow Telecine, rear view
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-3
5. Connections
5-4
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
CONNECTION UNIT FH 4125 (RACK 1)
Test
J6
Data out B1
J 28
iMCS
Control Assy R2
Illumination Assy
Film Pulses
J5
Data out G1
J 15
Spare 1
J7
Data out R2 G2 B2
J8
J 33
48 kHz out
J 22
J 19
J3
Audio Ref
48 kHz in
Audio Preampl
Data out R1
Connection Unit FH 4125
J 40
J 34
Analog out 1
Audio I / O
SR out 1
SR in 1
J 23
Analog out 2
J 29
SR out 2
J 35
SR in 2
Commag / Comopt
5.3
5. Connections
J 41
Lamp Control
Spare 2
J9
Sensor Clk out G
J 17
Optical & Pwr Ctrl Assy
J 16
Sensor Clk out R
J 20
J 44
Sensor Clk out B
J 11
J2
TE
Power 2
J4
PE
Power 8
J 42
Power 3
J 12
Scanner Power
J 43
J 21
Power 4
J 13
J 36
Analog in 1
J 25
Phones
J 31
Monitor R
J 37
Analog in 2
J 26
J 32
J 38
RS 232
J 10
Power 1
J 24
J 30
Digital out 1/2 Monitor L
Power 5
Power 6
J 18
J 27
PS Assy
Power 7
J 39
TE
PE
J 14
Fig. 503: Connection Unit FH 4125
Note:
The connectors on the connection fields backed gray, serve the external cabling.
All the other connectors are required for the internal cabling and must not be
changed!
The following chapters describe the connectors with their functions.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-5
5. Connections
5.3.1
STE-B1
AUDIO IN- AND OUTPUTS
Audio I / O
Analog out 1
SR out 1
SR in 1
1
5
9
J 23
J 29
J 35
Analog out 2
SR out 2
SR in 2
2
6
J 24
10
J 30
Digital out 1/2 Monitor L
J 36
Analog in 1
3
7
11
J 25
J 31
J 37
Phones
Monitor R
Analog in 2
4
8
12
J 26
J 32
J 38
Fig. 504: Part of the connection unit FH 4125 (Audio I/O)
Item
no.
5-6
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
1
J 35
SR in 1
XLR female
2
J 36
SR in 2
XLR female
Symmetrical audio inputs for the feed-in of a Dolby-SRaudio signal, impedance > 10 kOhm.
Level switchable –3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB below
normal level.
3
J 37
Analog in 1
XLR female
4
J 38
Analog in 2
XLR female
5
J 23
Analog out 1
XLR male
6
J 24
Analog out 2
XLR male
Symmetrical audio inputs,
impedance > 10 kOhm.
Level switchable –3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB below
normal level.
Symmetrical audio outputs,
impedance < 40 Ohm.
Level switchable –3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB below
normal level.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
7
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 25
Digital out 1/2
XLR male
Digital, serial interface for the audio channels, based
on the AES-EBU standard. Mono/Stereo interface.
AES Recommended Practice Draft AES 3-1992 (ANSI
S4.40, 1992)
Impedance 110 Ohm
Level: outputs > 3 Vpp
At pin 2 and 3 of the XLR male the push-pull signals are
connected via twisted-pair cable.
pinning:pin 1 screening
pin 2 signal
pin 3 signal
8
J 26
Phones
XLR male
Symmetrical analog stereo output for headphones,
XLR males, impedance 150 Ohm. Minimum load
32 ohm.
Level switchable –3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB below
normal level.
The volume is also controlled by the multi function dial
on the control panel.
pinning:pin 1 ground
pin 2 left channel
pin 3 right channel
9
J 29
SR out 1
XLR male
10
J 30
SR out 2
XLR male
Symmetrical audio outputs to external Dolby-SR-devices signals, XLR males, impedance < 40 Ohm.
Level switchable –3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB below
normal level.
11
J 31
Monitor L
XLR male
12
J 32
Monitor R
XLR male
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
Symmetrical analog audio output Left or Right for monitoring (active speaker), impedance < 40 Ohm.
Level switchable –3, 0, 4, 8 dBu for 0 VU = 9 dB below
normal level.
Volume control from –R to +6 dB by the multi function
dial on the control panel.
5-7
5. Connections
5.3.2
STE-B1
AUDIO REFERENCE SIGNALS
Audio Ref
48 kHz in
13
J 33
48 kHz out
14
J 34
Fig. 505: Part of connection unit FH 4125 (Audio Ref)
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
13
J 33
48 kHz in
BNC connector
Input to feed-in an external 48 kHz word clock, to synchronize the Telecine audio processor with external,
digital audio components.
Without external 48 kHz signal the digital audio is synchronized with the video output signal (TTL-Level).
14
J 34
48 kHz out
BNC connector
48 kHz clock output to synchronize external, digital audio components (TTL-Level).
5-8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.3.3
5. Connections
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS
The following table describes the internal cabling from rack to rack as well as the
cabling to the individual subassemblies in the Shadow. The internal cabling must
be changed by our service personnel only.
The table is only important for the service personnel and serves at this place only
for the information of the customer.
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Connected to
Cable (set)
1
J 2, Power 1
J 2, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 1
2
J 3, Film Pulses
J 72, Pulses R1 on Connection FH 6056 Multiclock Cable Set
Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
Multiclock Cable
3
J 4, Power 2
J 3, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
4
J 5, Data out R1
J 52, Data in R1 on Connection Data R1
Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
5
J 6, Data out G1
J 47, Data in G1 on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
Data G1
6
J 7, Data out B1
J 45, Data in B1 on Connection
Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
Data B1
7
J 8, Data out R2 G2 B2
J 57, Data in R2 G2 B2 on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
Data R2 G2 B2
8
J 9, Sensor Clk out R
J 5, Sensor Clock in R
FH 4400 Film Scanner
FH 4056 Multiclock Cable Set SC
Multiclock Cable 1 R
9
J 10, Sensor Clk out G
J 3, Sensor Clock in G
FH 4400 Film Scanner
FH 4056 Multiclock Cable Set SC
Multiclock Cable 1 G
10
J 11, Sensor Clk out B
J 1, Sensor Clock in B
FH 4400 Film Scanner
FH 4056 Multiclock Cable Set SC
Multiclock Cable 1 B
11
J 12, Power 3
J 7, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 3
12
J 13, Power 4
J 8, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 4
13
J 14, PS Assy
J 6, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
PS Assy
14
J 15, Illumination Assy
J 1, Control
FY 4421 Illumination Interface
Illumination Assy
15
J 16, Spare 1
not use
16
J 17, Lamp Control
J 5, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
Lamp Control
17
J 18, Power 5
J 11, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 5
18
J 19, Ctrl Assy R2
J 62, Ctrl Assy R1 on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
Ctrl Assy R1/R2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 2
5-9
5. Connections
Item
no.
STE-B1
Socket / Connector
Description
Connected to
Cable (set)
19
J 20, Optical & Pwr Ctrl Assy
J 9, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
Optical & Pwr Ctrl Assy
20
J 21, RS 232
not used
21
J 22, iMCS
J 7, AT-MR820TR Ethernet
10-Base-T Micro HUB
10Base_T_R1
22
J 27, Power 6
J 12, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 6
23
J 28, Test
not used
24
J 39, Power 7
J 13, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 7
25
J 40, Audio Preampl
J 3, FY 6011 Intermediate
Board
Audio Preampl
26
J 41, Commag / Comopt
J 2, FY 6011 Intermediate
Board
Commag / Comopt
27
J 42, Power 8
J 1, FH 4131 Terminal Panel
Power Supply Rack 1
FH 4059 Power Cable Set
Power 8
28
J 43, Scanner Power
J 2, FH 4400 Film Scanner
Scanner Power
29
J 44, Spare 2
not used
5-10
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5. Connections
5.4
CONNECTION UNIT FH 4225 (RACK 2)
Connection Unit
FH 4225
Data out
Link
A
Sync
1
B
Link A
J 25
Ser
Ref
J6
Sync 2
J7
J 26
Link B
J8
J
16
B1
R
G1
Data in
R2G2B2
R1
Ctrl Assy R1
Pulses out
Pulses R1
Spare
J 18
MSO
J 27
J 35
Link B
J 78
Digital Video out
J5
G
J 62
J 45
J 57
J 52
J 47
Sprocket in
Spooling I/O
Ctrl Assy R3
J 72
J 66
PulsesĆ1
R3/R2
PulsesĆ2
R3/R2
Local Panel
J 28
J 17
J 37
Pulses-2 R2
Pulses-1
R2
J 40
J 41
J 48
J 53
J 36
Power Hub
Remote
Lan
Monitoring
SDTV R3
HDTV R3
J 58
J 63
Power Fan 1 Power Fan 2 Filmdeck I/O Capstan I/O
J67
Tension R
J 73
Tension L
iMCS
J2
J9
J 19
J 46
J 29
Monitoring
J 38
Ch 1-R
Remote
Control 1
J3
Remote
Control 2
G/Y
B/Cb
J 11
Ch 3-B
R/Cr
J 12
J 13
(Key)
J 20
J 21
J 22
J 23
J 24
CFR in
Sync
out
J4
S
J1
J 54
J 59
G/Y
Time Code
J 10
Ch 2-G
S
J 49
J 42
J 14
B/Cb
R/Cr
S
(Key)
J 30
LTC in
Various out
Editor out
Extern aux
J 64
Remote
Rem 5
Rem 6
J 68
Keycode in
J 74
Pulses
Steadiness
J 31
J 32
J 43 a
J 69
J 60
J 50
LTC out
J 33
iMCS
J 55
TC Gen out Sepmag out
J
39
J 34
CFR
out
TE
Rem 4
J 65
J 75
Pullout
down
2V
out
J 70
J 43 b
FRS
J 15
J 51
J 56
J 61
J 76
V
out
PE
J 71
J 77
Fig. 506: Connection Unit FH 4225
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-11
5. Connections
5.4.1
STE-B1
KEYCODE IN
Keycode in
EXTERN
1
J 69
Fig. 507: Part of connection unit FH 4225
Item
no.
1
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 69
Keycode in
9-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
RS 232 or RS 422 input (switchable),
Interface to read e.g. KEYCODE information for insertion into VITC or LTC user bits.
1
5
Pin assignment:
Pin no.
RS 422
RS 232
1
TxB
2
TxA
TxD
3
RxB
RxD
6
4
RxB
9
5
Ground
6
TxA
7
TxB
8
RxA
9
RxA
Ground
The connection from the keycode reader device (decoder)
EVERTZ:
“Serial I/O” to the keycode reader input of STE-B1 Rack 2 - KEYCODE IN J 69
(9-pin / RS 232).
Cable
Evertz
Shadow
Sub-D 9 pin (male)
Sub-9 pin (male)
3 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Tx
2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Rx
5 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 GND
5-12
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5. Connections
ARRI:
“Serial I/O” to the keycode reader input of STE-B1 Rack 2 - KEYCODE IN J 69
(9-pin / RS 232).
Cable
ARRI
Shadow
Sub-D 9 pin (male)
Sub-9 pin (male)
2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Tx
3 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Rx
5 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 GND
AATON:
“Keylink Com 1” to the keycode reader input of STE-B1 Rack 2 - KEYCODE IN J69
(9-pin / RS 232).
Cable 1
AATON
Shadow
Sub-D 25 pin (male)
Sub-9 pin (male)
3 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Tx
2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Rx
7 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 GND
25 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 9
Cable 2 (is part of the AATON Keylink System)
Keylink PC “MTC board top socket” to the bi phase sync signal output of STE-B1
Rack 2 - TC GEN OUT - J 51 (9-pin / control Interface).
Pinning, see chapter 5.4.3.
5.4.2
COLOR FRAME REFERENCE SIGNALS
CFR in
CFR out
2
3
J 14
J 15
Fig. 508: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (CFR in / out)
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
2
J 14
CFR in
BNC connector
Color Frame Reference In
TTL input, used by Programmer/Editor systems
to synchronize film to tape transfer
3
J 15
CFR out
BNC connector
Color Frame Reference Out
TTL output, used for synchronization of Programmer
/ Editor (e.g. Pogle)
Signal details, see also chapter 7.5 Interfaces
figure 707.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-13
5. Connections
5.4.3
STE-B1
VARIOUS OUT
Various out
Editor out Extern aux
6
7
J 50
J 55
TC Gen out Sepmag out
4
5
J 51
J 56
Fig. 509: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 2)
Item
no.
4
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 51
TC Gen out
9-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
Timecode generator or keycode reader interface.
1
5
Pin assignment:
Pin no.
Signals with Capstan Ctrl. FY 6202
1
1x or 2x or 10x Bi Phase R Signal
2
SOF Pulse
3
not connected
6
4
Pre stop
9
5
1x or 2x or 10x Bi Phase S Signal
6
not connected
7
Ground (Digital)
8
not connected
9
+5V (Digital) 300 mA max.
Signal details, see also chapter Interfaces.
5-14
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
5
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 56
Sepmag out
9-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
Sepmag interface (two phase interlock signal)
1
5
Pin assignment:
Pin no.
6
9
Signals with Capstan Ctrl. FY 6202
1
1x or 2x or 10x Bi Phase R Signal
2
not connected
3
not connected
4
not connected
5
2x or 2x or 10x Bi Phase S Signal
6
not connected
7
Ground (Digital)
8
not connected
9
+5V (Digital) 300 mA max.
Signal details, see also chapter 7.5 Interfaces.
6
J 50
Editor out
9-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
Editor interface
Note: Function only with Capstan Control Board
FY 6202
Pin assignment:
Pin no.
1
5
Signals with Capstan Ctrl. FY 6202
1
BI Phase R Signal
2
SOF (Pulldown)
3
not connected
6
4
CFR OUT
9
5
BI Phase S Signal
6
not connected
7
Ground (Digital)
8
not connected
9
+5V (Digital) 300 mA max.
Signal details, see also chapter Interfaces.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-15
5. Connections
Item
no.
7
STE-B1
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 55
Extern aux
25-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
EXTERN AUX is a telecine controller interface based
on serial RS 422 standard.
It serves to connect the following controller devices
with the telecine unit:
D Pogle
Pandora
D DaVinci
Renaissance
D Sunburst
Colorvision
Pin assignment:
1
13
Pin no.
14
25
Signals
1
Reserved for Film_TC_TxD_A
2
Reserved for Film_TC_TxD_B
3
Film_TC_Common
4
Reserved for Film_TC_RxD_A
5
Reserved for Film_TC_RxD_B
6
SOF_Film_Common
7
Reserved for Studio_TC_TxD_A
8
Reserved for Studio_TC_TxD_B
9
Studio_TC_Common
10
SOF_Film_A
11
SOF_Film_B
12
Reserved for Studio_TC_RxD_A
13
Reserved for Studio_TC_RxD_B
14
not connected
15
Ground
16
SOF_Studio_A
17
SOF_Studio_B
18
SOF_Studio_Common
19
FWD/REV_A (Forward = High)
20
FWD/REV_B
21
+ 5 V (Digital) 300 mA max.
22
not connected
23
not connected
24
not connected
25
not connected
For more signal details, see also chapter Interfaces.
5-16
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.4.4
5. Connections
RJ45/IMCS
8
J 38
Fig. 510: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 2)
Item
no.
8
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 38
iMCS
RJ45 connector
female
This RJ45 connector is used to control the telecine
via workstation.
ANSI standard
Standard
Data rate
Cable length
Cable type
Connector
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
IEEE 802.3
10 MBit/sec
max. 100 m
STP7UTP Category 3 or
better
RJ45
5-17
5. Connections
5.4.5
STE-B1
REMOTE 4 - 6
(For future use!)
Remote
Rem 5
Rem 6
9
11
J 60
J 65
Rem 4
10
J 61
Fig. 511: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Remote)
Item
no.
9
10
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 60
Rem 5
J 61
Rem 4
9-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
RS 422 Interface connector not supported
1
5
5-18
Pin assignment:
Pin no.
Signals
1
Ground
2
Transmit A
3
Receive B
4
Ground
6
5
not used
9
6
Ground
7
Transmit B
8
Receive A
9
Ground
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
11
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 65
Rem 6
25-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
Parallel port for external simple control panels referenced to proposed SMPTE recommended practice
for D-1 format, dated February 1st, 1989 and
adapted to telecine requirements.
Command format: active low.
Pin assignment:
Pin no.
1
14
25
13
Note:
Signals Parallel (Standard mode)
1
Stop SW
2
Fast FWD SW
3
Fast rewind SW
4
Play SW
5
Play reverse SW
6
Stop lamp
7
FWD lamp
8
Rewind lamp
9
Play lamp
10
Play reverse lamp
11
Ground
12
Ground
13
Data out 7
14
Step FW SW
15
Step RV SW
16
Step FW lamp
17
Step RV lamp
18
Status 1
19
Status 2
20
Status 3
21
Status 4
22
Data in 7
23
Data out 12
24
+5V
(maximum current 750 mA / Ri = 0,4W)
25
+5V
(maximum current 750 mA / Ri = 0,4W)
- all switch pins go to +5V trough 1k Ohm
- all lamp feeds are 5V.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-19
5. Connections
5.4.6
STE-B1
WAVEFORM MONITORING
Monitoring
Ch 1–R
Remote
Control 1
J 10
Ch 2–G
J 11
Ch 3–B
13
12
J 12
J3
Remote
Control 2
S
J 13
J4
Fig. 512: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 2)
Item
no.
12
5-20
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 10 - J 13
CH 1-R, CH 2-G,
CH 3-B, S
Monitoring output
BNC connector
One set of analog outputs for connection of wave
form monitors. (Level adjustable on board FY 1408
via pot to equalize different cable length).
Diagram for correct cabling is described in chapter 3.
System Applications section 3.9 Waveform Monitoring.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
13
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J3
Remote Control 1
J4
Remote Control 2
15-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
For remote control of waveform monitor
Cable Length max. 50m
Sustained types of waveform monitors are:
D Philips PT 5464 HD
all standards, waveform and vector display
D Philips PT 5664 SDTV
Note!
Disconnect pin 1 of the control cable PT 5664,
otherwise the remote control functions are disturbed.
D TEK 1735/1730 HD
SDTV & HDTV, 2x3 BNC inputs available
D TEK 1740/1750/1760 SDTV
1
8
9
15
Storing the presets - via menu MONITORING F11
preset WFM “Preset for WFM 300” F10 STORE - is
not supported. Use the front control panel for storing
presets. Create a connection cable, see table 500
on page 5-22.
D TEK WFM 300/300A SDTV only
Pin assignment:
Pin no.
Remote Control 1
Remote Control 2
1
WFM-CTRL1-1
WFM-CTRL2-1
2
WFM-CTRL1-2
WFM-CTRL2-2
3
WFM-CTRL1-3
WFM-CTRL2-3
4
WFM-CTRL1-4
WFM-CTRL2-4
5
WFM-CTRL1-5
WFM-CTRL2-5
6
WFM-CTRL1-6
WFM-CTRL2-6
7
WFM-CTRL1-7
WFM-CTRL2-7
8
WFM-CTRL1-8
WFM-CTRL2-8
9
WFM-GND1
WFM-GND2
10
WFM-CTRL1-10
WFM-CTRL2-10
11
WFM-CTRL1-11
WFM-CTRL2-11
12
WFM-CTRL1-12
WFM-CTRL2-12
13
WFM-CTRL1-13
WFM-CTRL2-13
14
WFM-CTRL1-14
WFM-CTRL2-14
15
WFM-CTRL1-15
WFM-CTRL2-15
Output drivers opto coupler PC 354 see chapter 7. Interfaces
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-21
5. Connections
STE-B1
Connection cable for waveform monitors type TEK 1740/1750/1760.
15-pin subminiature
D-connector
male
25-pin subminiature
D-connector
male
pin 9
pin 5
pin 6
pin 7
pin 14
pin 18
pin 19
pin 17
Function
GND
Recall 2 Superimposed
Recall 3 Vector
Recall 1 Parade
Table 500: Connection cable WFM
5.4.7
PULSES OUT
Pulses out
14
J 66
Fig. 501: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 2)
Item
no.
14
5-22
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 66
Pulses out
25-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
”Pulses out” is a general purpose pulse output connector with telecine internal synchronization pulses.
It serves to connect the SCREAM Grain Reducer
with the telecine unit:
All signals ECL-Level (Emitter Coupled Logic)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
14
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 66
Pulses out
25-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
Pin assignment:
1
13
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
14
25
Pin no.
Signals
1
CLK 120 MHz
2
Ground (CLK 120 MHz)
3
CLK 60 MHz
4
Ground
5
SOL Start of Line
horizontal synchronization pulse
6
Ground (SOL)
7
IOL Increment of Lines
film speed synchronization pulse
8
Ground
9
not connected
10
not connected
11
SOF Start of Frame
vertical synchronization pulse
12
not connected
13
not connected
14
CLK 120 MHz
15
Ground (CLK 60 MHz)
16
CLK 60 MHz
17
Ground
18
SOL Start of Line
horizontal synchronization pulse
19
Ground (IOL)
20
IOL Increment of Lines
film speed synchronization pulse
21
Ground
22
not connected
23
Ground (SOF)
24
SOF Start of Frame
vertical synchronization pulse
25
not connected
5-23
5. Connections
5.4.8
STE-B1
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS
The following table describes the internal cabling from rack to rack as well as the
cabling to the individual subassemblies in the Shadow. The internal cabling must
be changed by our service personnel only.
The table is only important for the service personnel and serves at this place only
for the information of the customer.
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Connected to
Cable (set)
1
J 2, Monitoring HDTV R3
J 56, Monitoring HDTV R2 on
Connection Unit FH 6325
Rack 3
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Monitoring HDTV R3
2
J 9, Monitoring SDTV R3
J 55, Monitoring SDTV R2 on
Connection Unit FH 6325
Rack 3
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Monitoring SDTV R3
3
J 37, Data out B
J 59, Data in B on Connection
Unit FH 6325 Rack 3
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Data B
4
J 38, iMCS 1
Port 6, AT-MR820TR Ethernet
10Base-T Micro HUB
10Base_T_R2_1_FDC
5
J 40, Data out G
J 58, Data in G on Connection
Unit FH 6325 Rack 3
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Data G
6
J 41, Data out R
J 57, Data in R on Connection
Unit FH 6325 Rack 3
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Data R
7
J 45, Data in B1
J 7, Data out B1 on Connection Data B1
Unit FH 4125 Rack 1
8
J 46, Power Hub
not used
9
J 47, Data in G1
J 6, Data out G1 on Connection Unit FH 4125 Rack 1
Data G1
10
J 48, Sprocket in
FH 6018 Sprocket Wheel
Pulse Tacho
Sprocket in
11
J 49, Power Fan 1
J 1, FH 6350 Fan Unit Rack 2
(1st generation) or
FH 4255 (2nd generation)
Power Fan 1 R2
12
J 52, Data in R1
J 5, Data out R1 on Connection Unit FH 4125 Rack 1
Data R1
13
J 53, Spooling I/O
J 4, FX 1026 Spooling Power
Amplifier
Spooling I/O
14
J 54, Power Fan 2
J 1, FH 4250 Rear Fan Unit
Rack 2
Power Fan 2 rear R2
15
J 57, Data in R2 G2 B2
J 8, Data out R2 G2 B1 on
Connection Unit FH 4125
Rack 1
Data R2 G2 B2
16
J 58, Local Panel
J 1, FH 4500 Local Control Panel
Local Panel
17
J 59, Filmdeck I/O
J 1, FY 6011 Intermediate
Board
Filmdeck I/O
5-24
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Connected to
Cable (set)
18
J 62, Ctrl Assy R1
J 19, Ctrl Assy R2 on Connection Unit FH 4125 Rack 1
Control Assy R1/R2
19
J 63, Ctrl Assy R3
J 48, Ctrl Assy R2 on Connection Unit FH 6325 Rack 3
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Control Assy R2/R3
20
J 64, Capstan I/O
J 1, FD 2 ST 9 A Capstan
Servo Power Stage
Capstan I/O
21
J 67, Pulses-1 R3/R2
J 49, Pulses-1 R2 on Connection Unit FH 6325 Rack 3
FH 6056 Multiclock Cable Set RR
Multiclock Cable 2
22
J 68, Tension R
J 1, FX 6015 Film Tension
Board Right
FH 1043 Wire Set Filmdeck
Tension R
23
J 72, Pulses R1
J 3, Film Pulses on Connection FH 6056 Multiclock Cable Set
Unit FH 4125 Rack 1
Multiclock Cable
24
J 73, Pulses-2 R3/R2
J 50, Pulses-2 R2 on Connection Unit FH 6325 Rack 3
FH 6056 Multiclock Cable Set RR
Multiclock Cable 2
25
J 74, Tension L
J 1, FX 6015 Film Tension
Board Left
FH 1043 Wire Set Filmdeck
Tension L
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-25
5. Connections
5-26
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.5
5. Connections
CONNECTION UNIT FH 6325 RACK 3
POWER
REAR FAN UNIT R3
J 73
Connection Unit FH 6325
DIGITAL VIDEO OUT
ANALOG VIDEO OUT
HDTV
G/Y
SDTV
G/Y
G/Y
G/Y
J1
J7
J 12
J 19
B/Cb
B/Cb
B/Cb
B/Cb
HDTV
SDTV
LINK A
LINK A
EXTERN
EXTERN
TIME
CODE
TIME
CODE
LTC IN
MONITORING
CTRL ASSY OUT
PULSE 1 R 2
J 47
J 49
J2
J8
J 13
J 20
R/Cr
R/Cr
R/Cr
LTC OUT
J 29
J 55
J 57
J 27
MONITORING
J 41 B
J9
J 14
J 21
S
S
S
S
J4
J 10
J 15
J 22
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
J5
J 11
J 16
J 23
R
J 41 A
R/Cr
J3
DATA IN R 2
SDTV R 2
CTRL ASSY R 2
LINK B
LINK B
PULSE R 2
G
HDTV R 2
RS 232
J 48
J 56
J 50
J 58
DATA INTERFACE
J 42
POWER R 2
DATA DET
ERROR
ENA DATA
CONNECT
VCC
M2V
VEE
TMP
PULLDOWN
OUT
B
2 V OUT
J 30
J 17
FRS
J 18
J 28
J 24
V OUT
J 25
LINK A
SYNC 1
SYNC 2
SYNC 3
SER REF
J 31
J 35
J 38
J 43
J 45
J 32
J 36
J 39
J 44
J 46
iMCS 1
J 26
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
Eye safe
Product complies with DHHS
Rule 21 CFR Subchapter J in
effect at date of manufacture
J 59
J 51
POWER
FAN UNIT
Spare
LINK B
J 60
J 33
SDTV
SYNC OUT SYNC OUT
J 53
TE
Option FH 6335
J 34
J 37
PE
J 40
Fig. 502: Connection Unit FH 6325
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-27
5. Connections
5.5.1
STE-B1
ANALOG VIDEO OUT
(HDTV Output only with option FH 1675)
ANALOG VIDEO OUT
HDTV
G/Y
SDTV
G/Y
G/Y
G/Y
J1
J7
J 12
J 19
B/Cb
B/Cb
B/Cb
B/Cb
J2
J8
J 13
J 20
R/Cr
R/Cr
R/Cr
R/Cr
J3
J9
J 14
J 21
S
S
S
S
J4
J 10
J 15
J 22
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
J5
J 11
J 16
J 23
SDTV J 12 - J 16
J 19 - J 23
1
HDTV J 1 - J 5
J 7 - 11
2
Fig. 503: Part of the connection unit FH 6325 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
1
2
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 12 - J 16,
J 19 - J 23
SDTV video outputs
J 1 - J 5,
J 7 - J 11
HDTV video outputs
BNC connector
HDTV & SDTV
2 x 5 BNC connectors R, G, B, S, K, switchable to
Y, CB, CR, S, K independent of the digital output
SYNC signal in G-, Y-channel, switchable ON/OFF
SYNC signal in R-, B-, CR-, CB-channel, switchable
ON/OFF
Always 4x4 output EDTV/SDTV resolution. In 8:4:4
mode EDTV 4x4 resolution. All these BNC are outputs
of analog picture signals. The analog blanking width is
corresponding to SMPTE or CCIR. For all analog outputs it is possible to switch off the blanking (menu
VIDEO). For the luminance –, the key – and the green
signal it is possible to switch transparency the vertical
blanking for a stamped-in VITC signal (menu VIDEO).
Signal level (+ sync):
Impedance:
Return loss:
0.7 VPP (+ 0.3 VPP)
75 ohm
> 35 dB min.
Sync level:
4 VPP for SDTV (Bilevel),
" 0.3 V for HDTV (Trilevel),
75 ohm
> 26 dB min.
Impedance:
Return loss:
5-28
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
RGB
for SDTV operating
1
J 12, J 19
BNC connector
Components
for SDTV operating
G:
Green component
Y:
Luminance signal
J 13, J 20
B:
Blue component
CB:
Blue color-difference
signal
J 14, J 21
R:
Red component
CR:
Red color-difference
signal
J 16, J 23
K:
Key signal
–
J 15, J 22
S:
Bilevel synchronization signal
S:
RGB
for HDTV operating
2
J 1, J 7
BNC connector
Bilevel synchronization signal 4 VPP
Components
for HDTV operating
G:
Green component
Y:
Luminance signal
J 2, J 8
B:
Blue component
CB:
Blue color-difference
signal
J 3, J 9
R:
Red component
CR:
Red color-difference
signal
J 5, J 11
K:
Key signal
–
J 4, J 10
S:
Trilevel synchronization signal
S:
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
Trilevel synchronization signal
5-29
5. Connections
STE-B1
5.5.2
DIGITAL VIDEO OUT
5.5.2.1
SDTV (EDTV / 8:4:4)*
DIGITAL VIDEO OUT
HDTV
SDTV
LINK A
LINK A
J 29
J 27
LINK B
3
SDTV (EDTV / 8:4:4)*
4
SDTV (EDTV / 8:4:4)*
LINK B
J 30
J 28
LINK A
J 31
J 32
LINK B
J 33
J 34
* = prepared
Fig. 504: Part of the connection unit FH 6325 (Rack 3)
5-30
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
3
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 29
Link A
(parallel data)
J 30
Link B
(parallel data)
25-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
SDTV / EDTV parallel data
Link A / B
SDTV 4:2:2 CCIR 656 or 4x4 format (EDTV / 8:4:4
prepared)
Digital Video Outputs for the SDTV Data feed to any
other 4:4:4(:4) SDTV signal processor like noise reducer or color corrector.
Operation mode switchable, same mode at serial and
parallel output. R, G, B, K or Y, CB, CR, K switchable
between 10 bit and 8 bit with static rounding.
See item number 4 Link A / Link B serial data outputs.
Link A (parallel data)
D 4:2:2 CCIR 656,
D
D
D
D
or
4:2:2:4
or
4x4,
or
4x4,
or
8:4:4,
Y , CB / CR
Y, CB, / CR
Y , CB0 / CR0
G , B0 / R0
Y0, CB0 / CR0
Link B (parallel data)
D 4:2:2⋅CCIR 656
D
D
D
D
4
J 31, J 32
Link A
(serial data)
J 33, J 34
Link B
(serial data)
BNC-connector,
Serial
270/360 MBit/s,
CCIR 656
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
or
4:2:2:4
or
4x4
or
4x4
or
8:4:4⋅
Y , CB / CR
K, 0/0
K , CB1 / CR1
K , B1 / R1
Y1 , CB1 / CR1
SDTV / EDTV CCIR 656 serial data
EBU TECH 3267-E
EBU TECH 3268-E
SMPTE T14.22
5-31
5. Connections
5.5.2.2
STE-B1
HDTV Outputs Parallel
(Only with option FH 4069 HDTV Output)
DIGITAL VIDEO OUT
HDTV
SDTV
LINK A
LINK A
J 29
J 27
LINK B
5
LINK B
J 30
J 28
LINK A
J 31
J 32
LINK B
J 33
J 34
Fig. 505: Part of the connection unit FH 6325 (Rack 3)
5-32
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Item
no.
5
5. Connections
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 27
HDTV out Link A
(parallel video data)
50-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
HDTV parallel video data
Operation mode switchable
- 2x 4:2:2
- 4x4
- 4:2:2:4, Key signal on Link B
R, G, B, K or Y, CB, CR, K. Switchable between 10 bit
and 8 bit with static rounding. Clock and data timing
according to CCIR or EU 95. Pinning according to
CCIR TG11. Cable adapter for EU 95, SMPTE 260M
and SMPTE 274M necessary
J 28
HDTV out Link B
(parallel video data)
CCIR Link A
D 4:2:2
D
D
D
D
D
D
or
4:2:2:4
or
4x4
or
4x4
or
4x4
or
8:8:8
or
8:8:8
Y, CB / CR
Y, CB / CR
Y, CB0 / CR0
G, B0 / R0
G, R
Y, CR
G, R
CCIR Link B
D 4:2:2
D
D
D
D
D
D
or
4:2:2:4
or
4x4
or
4x4
or
4x4
or
8:8:8
or
8:8:8
Y, CB / CR
K, 0/0
K, CB1 / CR1
K, B1 / R1
K, B
K, CB
K, B
CCIR Link A/B
Y, CB, CR
Digital parallel interface, pinning according to CCIR
Document TG 11/1–11/2 for the HDTV Y/C Signal
4:2:2.
DATA0...9 (MSB) used for the luminance signal Y
DATA10...19 (MSB) used for the chrominance signal
CR CB (8/10 bit mode switchable)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-33
5. Connections
Item
no.
STE-B1
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
Coding & Data format
Details of the video data connector CCIR Y/C
5
TV Standard
Coding + Data format
Clock
1250/50
CCIR TG 11/1–11/2 or
EU 95–PG02/03
36 MHz
1125/60
SMPTE 260M
74.25 MHz
1125/59.94
SMPTE 260M
74.18 MHz
1920x1080/60
SMPTE 274M
74.25 MHz
1920x1080/59.94
SMPTE 274M
74.18 MHz
1280x720/60P
only with Option
DTV FH 4066
SMPTE 296 M
74.25 MHz
1208x720/59.94P
only with Option
DTV FH 4066
SMPTE 296 M
74.18 MHz
Pin assignment
The 20 bits in each data word for the 1250/1125 - 1920x1080
signals are denoted data 00 to 19. Data 19 is the MSB (most
significant bit) of the color difference data while data 09 is the
MSB of the luminance data. The electrical specifications of
the Video Data I/O connector are identically to EU-95 standard.
Mechanical pinning, according to CCIR Documentation
TG 11/1 – TG 12/1, see table below
Contact
Bit no.
Signal
Contact
Bit no.
1
-
clk a
2
19
data 09a
18
-
3
18
data 08a
19
-
4
17
data 07a
20
5
16
data 06a
6
15
7
Signal
Contact
Bit no.
Signal
34
-
clk b
gnd
35
19
data 09b
gnd
36
18
data 08b
11
data 01a
37
17
data 07b
21
11
data 01b
38
16
data 06b
data 05a
22
10
data 00a
39
15
data 05b
14
data 04a
23
10
data 00b
40
14
data 04b
8
13
data 03a
24
-
gnd
41
13
data 03b
9
12
data 02a
25
-
gnd
42
12
data 02b
10
9
data 19a
26
-
gnd
43
9
data 19b
11
8
data 18a
27
-
gnd
44
8
data 18b
12
7
data 17a
28
1
data 11a
45
7
data 17b
13
6
data 16a
29
1
data 11b
46
6
data 16b
14
5
data 15a
30
0
data 10a
47
5
data 15b
15
4
data 14a
31
0
data 10b
48
4
data 14b
16
3
data 13a
32
-
gnd
49
3
data 13b
17
2
data 12a
33
-
gnd
50
2
data 12b
Fig. 506: Pinning of Data I/O Connector CCIR Y/C
5-34
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.5.2.3
5. Connections
HDTV Outputs Serial
(Only with option FH 4069 HDTV Output)
Rack 3 Terminal Panel
Serializer
Link A
Serial Output
4:2:2
Serial Output
6
4x4
Link B
Serial Output
4:2:2
Serial Output
Fig. 507:
Item
no.
6
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 27
HDTV out Link A
(serial video data)
2x
BNC-connector
75 W
J 28
HDTV out Link B
(serial video data)
2x
BNC-connector
75 W
HDTV serial video data
Operation mode switchable
- 2x 4:2:2
- 4x4
- 4:2:2:4, Key signal on Link B
R, G, B, K or Y, CB, CR, K. Switchable between 10 bit
and 8 bit with static rounding.
HD SDI Video Out according to SMPTE - 292M,
1.485 and 1.485/1.001 Gb/s
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-35
5. Connections
Item
no.
6
STE-B1
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 27
HDTV out Link A
(serial video data)
2x
BNC-connector
75 W
CCIR Link A
J 28
HDTV out Link B
(serial video data)
2x
BNC-connector
75 W
D 4:2:2
D
D
D
D
Y, CB / CR
or
4:2:2:4
or
4x4
or
4x4
or
4x4
Y, CB / CR
Y, CB0 / CR0
G, B0 / R0
G, R
CCIR Link B
D 4:2:2
D
D
D
D
Y, CB / CR
or
4:2:2:4
or
4x4
or
4x4
or
4x4
K, 0/0
K, CB1 / CR1
K, B1 / R1
K, B
HDTV standards
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
5-36
1280 x 720 / 60 Hz progressive
1280 x 720 / 59.94 Hz progressive
1920 x 1080 / 24 Hz progressive
1920 x 1080 / 23.98 Hz progressive
1920 x 1080 / 25 Hz progressive
1920 x 1080 / 24 segmented frame
1920 x 1080 / 23.98 segmented frame
1920 x 1080 / 50 interlaced 2:1
1920 x 1125 / 60 interlaced 2:1
1920 x 1125 / 59.94 interlaced 2:1
1920 x 1125 / 60 interlaced 2:1
1920 x 1080 / 59.94 interlaced 2:1
Restrictions
1920 x 1250 / 50 interlaced 2:1 is not supported.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.5.3
5. Connections
SYNC PULSES OUTPUTS
PULLDOWN
OUT
2V OUT
9
J 17
FRS
J 24
V OUT
7
10
J 18
J 25
8
Fig. 508: Part of the connection unit FH 6325 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
7
J 17
Pulldown out
BNC-connector
“Telecine Frame Pulse” for a key code reader/ time
code reader / generator
TTL level (for more details see chapter 7. Interfaces)
8
J 18
FRS
BNC-connector
The FRS (Freeze Signal) is used to mark repeated
fields
TTL level
9
J 24
2V out
BNC-connector
TTL pulse for test and alignment
10
J 25
V out
BNC-connector
TTL pulse for test and alignment
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-37
5. Connections
5.5.4
STE-B1
EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUTS
For synchronization of the telecine.
SYNC 1
SYNC 2
SYNC 3
SER REF
J 35
J 38
J 43
J 45
J 36
11
J 39
12
J 44
SYNC OUT
SDTV
SYNC OUT
J 37
J 40
J 46
13
14
15
16
Fig. 509: Part of the connection unit FH 6325 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
11
J 35, J 36
Sync 1
BNC-connector
Loop input 1 for an analog studio reference
SDTV: bilevel
0,3 Vss - 4 Vss
HDTV: trilevel
0,6 Vss
12
J 38, J 39
Sync 2
BNC-connector
Loop input 2 for an analog studio reference
SDTV: bilevel
0,3 Vss - 4 Vss
HDTV: trilevel
0,6 Vss
13
J 43, J 44
Sync 3
BNC-connector
Loop input 3 for an analog studio reference
SDTV: bilevel
0,3 Vss - 4 Vss
HDTV: trilevel
0,6 Vss
14
J 45, J 46
Ser Ref
BNC-connector
4:2:2 serial, 270 Mbit/s (CCIR 656)
ECL Level 270 MHz 800 mV
15
J 37
Sync out
BNC-connector
Sync output reflects the level of the selected EXT
REF signal Sync 1 - 3.
16
J 40
SDTV Sync out
BNC-connector
Bilevel SDTV sync pulse 625 / 525 / 651 lines at 25 /
30 / 24 Hz frame rates also in HDTV and data mode
Unterminated
4 Vss
Terminated with 75 Ω
2 Vss
Especially designed for the vertical synchronization of
telecine controllers.
Note:
The Sync input is selected by the control panel menu Setup, F7 ”Genlock Settings”, Genlock ref-sync-select.
Note!
For external synchronization of the Shadow Telecine an appropriate sync signal
has to be provided.
In case of SDTV standards an analog bilevel SDTV - sync signal or a serial digital
SDI - signal are applicable.
5-38
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5. Connections
Synchronization of HDTV
For (H)DTV applications an analog trilevel (H)DTV - sync has to be applied. This
external sync signal must be fully compliant to the selected (H)DTV standard.
Note!
Synchronization of (H)DTV operating modes to SDTV sync signals is not supported
(not possible).
For example, the V sync of the 625/50 standard can not be used in the Shadow
Telecine for synchronizing the (H) DTV standard 1920 x 1080 25p.
5.5.5
TIME CODE
TIME
TIME
CODE
CODE
LTC IN
Á
Á
17
J 41 A
LTC OUT
18
J 41 B
Fig. 510: Part of the connection unit FH 6325 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
17
J 41 A
LTC in
XLR female
XLR input connector
Interface for ARRI film time code information
18
J 41 B
LTC out
XLR male
XLR output connector
LTC (linear timecode) compatible to the standard
SMPTE 12M.
5.5.6
CONTROLS
SPARE
19
J 53
Fig. 511: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
19
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 53
Spare
RJ45 connector
Connected to option Data Output Board FY 6345 but
not supported!
(for future use)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-39
5. Connections
5.5.7
STE-B1
IMCS 1
iMCS 1
20
J 51
Fig. 512: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
20
5.5.8
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 51
iMCS 1
RJ45 connector
This RJ45 connector is used to extend the iMCS 1 - bus
for connecting Graphical Control Panel, Diagnostic PC
or telecine controller.
Details about the standard see chapter 7. “Interfaces
RJ45/iMCS”.
RS 232 INTERFACE
RS 232
21
J 42
Fig. 513: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
21
5-40
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 42
RS 232
9-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
Serial RS 232 interface port for test and alignment
purposes.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.5.9
5. Connections
EXTERN, CONTROL ASSY OUT
EXTERN
EXTERN
CTRL ASSY OUT
22
J47
Fig. 514: Part of the connection unit FH 4225 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
22
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
J 47
Ctrl Assy Out
9-pin
subminiature
D-connector
female
Daisy chain
Connection to external Racks.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-41
5. Connections
5.5.10
STE-B1
DATA INTERFACE
5.5.10.1 FH 6335 HIPPI Serial Interface
FH 6335 is part of option FH 4101 Transfer Engine Package
Rack 3
Connection Unit
FH 6325
DATA INTERFACE
PULLDOWN
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
Eye safe
DATA DET
ERROR
ENA DATA
CONNECT
VCC
M2V
VEE
TMP
HIPPI Serial Data out
fibre connector
22
160-pin
VG-connector
female
Product complies with DHHS
Rule 21 CFR Subchapter J in
effect at date of manufacture
Type Label
Option FH 6335
HIPPI Serial Interface FH 6335
Fig. 515: Part of the connection unit FH 6325 (Rack 3)
Item
no.
23
Socket / Connector
Description
Socket type
Connector type
Function
Serial Data out
Fibre connector
female
It provides a means of high-speed data transmission via
a pair of fiber optic cables. The Serial Interface is intended to be used where cable lengths up to 500 m are
required.
Multi-Mode Fibre Cable
Manufacturer:
AMP
Order No.: 349565 SC - Duplex
Cable:
Type
Length
Bandwidth
Optical loss:
Connectors:
Type
Mean loss
Standard deviation loss
Optical return loss
Number of connectors
5-42
50/125 mm MMF
max. 500 m
min. 500 MHz *km
@ 780 nm
max. 4 dB / km
SC duplex
max. 0.11 dB
0.15 dB
min. 20 dB
max. 8 between two
transceivers
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.5.11
5. Connections
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS
The following table describes the internal cabling from rack to rack as well as the
cabling to the individual subassemblies in the Shadow. The internal cabling must
be changed by our service personnel only.
The table is only important for the service personnel and serves at this place only
for the information of the customer.
Item
no.
Socket / Connector
Description
Connected to
1
J 26, Power R2
not used
2
J 48, Ctrl Assy R2
J 63, Ctrl Assy R3 on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Control Assy R2/R3
3
J 49, Pulse-1 R2
J 67, Pulses-1 R3/R2 on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
FH 6056 Multiclock Cable Set RR
Multiclock Cable 2
4
J 50, Pulse R2
J 73, Pulses-2 R3/R2 on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
FH 6056 Multiclock Cable Set RR
Multiclock Cable 2
5
J 51, iMCS
Port 4, AT-MR820TR Ethernet
10Base-T Micro HUB
10Base_T_R3
5
J 55, Monitoring SDTV R2
J 9, Monitoring SDTV R3 on
Connection Unit FH 4225
Rack 2
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Monitoring SDTV R3
6
J 56, Monitoring HDTV R2
J 2, Monitoring HDTV R3 on
Connection Unit FH 4225
Rack 2
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Monitoring HDTV R3
7
J 57, Data in R
J 41, Data out R on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Data R
8
J 58, Data in G
J 40, Data out G on Connection Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Data G
9
J 59, Data in B
J 37, Data out B on Connection FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Unit FH 4225 Rack 2
Data B
10
J 60, Power Fan Unit
J 1, FH 6350 Fan Unit Rack 3
(1st generation) or
FH 4255 (2nd generation)
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Power Fan 1 R3
11
J 73, Power Rear Fan Unit
J 1, FH 4250 Rear Fan Unit
Rack 3
FH 4057 Upgrade Cable Set
Power Fan 2 Rear R3
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
Cable (set)
5-43
5. Connections
5-44
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
5.6
5. Connections
IMCS CONNECTIONS (RJ45)
The Ethernet 10Base-T Micro HUB is mounted in the rear of the unit over the racks
2 and 3. See chapter 4.16, figure 435 “Location of the Subunits”. The Micro HUB
is internally connected with the iMCS connectors of the racks 1 – 3. External devices have to be connected via the four RJ45 connectors of the terminal panel.
Connection Unit
FH 4125
Rack 1
Connection Unit
FH 4225
Rack 2
iMCS
J 51
1.5 M
10Base_T_R2
iMCS
J 38
2.0 M
10Base_T_R1
iMCS
J 22
Connection Unit
FH 6325
Rack 3
10Base_T_R3
1.5 M
10BASE-T Network Ports
10BASE2/AUI BACKBONE PORT
Port 8
MDI
AUI
OFF ON
MDI-X
Port 7 Port 6 Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
TERMINATOR
10Base_T_Out3
10Base_T_Out2
10Base_T_Out4
10Base_T_Out1
10BASE2
AUI
OFF
10BASE2 ON
BACKBONE
MEDIA
SELECT ENABLE
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
1.5 M
internal connections
external connections
MAU1
MAU2
MAU3
MAU4/
EXT HUB
MAU .. = Medium Attachment Unit (E. G. Pogle)
RJ45 Terminal panel
Fig. 516: Internal and external RJ45 connections
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-45
5. Connections
STE-B1
On the Micro HUB AT-MR820TR there is also a 10Base2 port (BNC connector)
available.
Important 50 W terminator settings!
10Base2 port
unconnected
D If the 10Base2 port (BNC connector) is not used, switch the TERMINATOR to
“ON” and plug in an additional 50 W terminator.
Otherwise the internal communication via the HUB could be disturbed.
STE-B1 Micro Hub
ON
Attention!
Plug in additional terminator
TERMINATOR
50W
10BASE2
Fig. 517:
10Base2 port
as one bus end
connected
D If this connector will be used and realized as one end of the external iMCS bus,
e.g. for a telecine controller, make sure that the port is terminated (50 W at each
side).
Set TERMINATOR switch to “ON”. Also switch MEDIA SELECT and BACKBONE ENABLE to ”ON”.
STE-B1 Micro Hub
e.g. Telecine Controller
ON
TERMINATOR
10BASE2
50W
Fig. 518:
5-46
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
10Base2 port
via
BNC T-connector
connected
5. Connections
D In case the 10Base2 port is is used as part of a iMCS bus via a BNC T-connector
(e.g. for a service PC with SDCMAINT) then set TERMINATOR to “OFF”.
STE-B1 Micro Hub
e.g. Service PC
with SDCMAINT
50W
e.g. Telecine Controller
OFF
TERMINATOR
10BASE2
50W
Fig. 519:
Note:
If external HUB connected, set MDI/MDI-X switch on internal HUB to MDI-X
or use crossed RJ45 patch cable.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
5-47
5. Connections
5-48
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.
OPERATIONAL CONTROLS
This section describes switches, test points and LEDs of all boards within Rack 1-3.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0 12
EF
3
D
4
C
5
6
BA
987
ASPB
FY 4114
Analog Signal Processing Blue
0 12
EF
3
D
4
C
5
6
BA
987
ASPG
FY 4114
Analog Signal Processing Green
0 12
EF
3
D
4
C
5
6
BA
987
ASPR
FY 4114
Analog Signal Processing Red
MCG
FY 4113
Master Clock Generator
SPF
FY 4109
Scanner Pixel Format
SCB
FY 4106
Scanner Control Board
ASC
FY 4105
Analog Signal Control
OPTION
AUDIO ILLUMINATION-FILM PREPROCESSING
APB
FY 1103/6103
Audio Processor Board
AOT
FY 1102
Audio Output Transformer
AEB
FY 1101
Audio Equalizer Board
1
OPTION
RACK 1
OPTION
6.1
16
Fig. 601:Overview boards rack 1
1. FY 1101
2. FY 1102
Audio Equalizer
Audio Output
3. FY 1103 / FY 6103
Audio Processor
4. Reserve
5. FY 4105.xx
Analog Signal Control
6. FY 4106.xx
Scanner Control Board
7. Reserve
8. Reserve
9. FY 4109.xx
Scanner Pixel Format
10. Reserve
11. Reserve
12. Reserve
13. FY 4113.xx
Master Clock Generator
14. FY 4114.xx
Analog Signal Processor RED
15. FY 4114.xx
Analog Signal Processor GREEN
16. FY 4114.xx
Analog Signal Processor BLUE
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-1
6. Operational Controls
6.1.1
STE-B1
AUDIO EQUALIZER FY 1101 (OPTION)
1 - 4 +
6 LEDs (5x green): +12V; +8.25V; +5V; –5V; –12V
5 LED not in use
AEB
FY 1101
1
2
3
4
5
6
6-2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.1.2
AUDIO OUTPUT FY 1102 (OPTION)
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 , 3 , 4 + 6 LEDs (4x green): +15V; +5V; –5V; –15V
2 + 5 LEDs not in use
7 Interface (9 pin, male): AES/EBU digital audio test input
AOT
FY 1102
7
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-3
6. Operational Controls
6.1.3
STE-B1
AUDIO PROCESSOR FY 1103 / FY 6103 (OPTION)
1
2
3
4 7
5 8
6 9
1 , 3 , 4 + 6 LEDs (4x green): +12V; +5V; –5V; –12V
2 + 5 LEDs not in use
7 - 9 LEDs (green, yellow, red): processor control indicators
green: no errors (red: OFF)
yellow: monitor program started (service)
red: power up test error or online error (green: OFF)
green ON/red flashing: warnings
(level overflow, data transmission etc.)
10
11
10 Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service terminal
11 Measuring points: M 14 / M 15, processor reset (shortcircuit)
12 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
12
13 Service button: internal test tone gen. ON (1 kHz / 0 VU)
6.1.4
FY 1103/6103
APB
13
ANALOG SIGNAL CONTROL FY 4105
1 - 3
1
LED (red) ON: Stand by for rack 1, 2, 3
2
3
4
4
6
5 - 7
5
7
8
Button 1: reset for MCK (micro computer kernel)
LEDs (green) ON: VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
8
Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service
terminal
9
Interface (40 pin, male): test point signal out
9
ASC
FY 4105.xx
10
6-4
10
Button 2: test for MCK
hold button 2 and press button 1: starts MCK mon. progr. (service)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.1.5
SCANNER CONTROL BOARD FY 4106
1
2
1 - 5 LEDs (5xgreen): +15V; –15V; +5V; –2V; –5V
3
4
6
Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service terminal
7
Interface (26 pin, male): Programmer interface
LCA READY LED green: LCA reset; red: LCA boot; off: LCA loaded
TEMP LED red: excess temperature of board
MOT ERR LED red: motor power amp over current
ERROR LED red: error of fan in scanner, proj.lamp, Rack 1 or cabinet top
FM CORR LED: not in use
GSD TARGET LED yellow: in target; off: during positioning
FW TARGET LED yellow: in target; off: during positioning
FM TARGET LED yellow: in target; off: during positioning
LAMP ERROR LED red: no projection lamp current
RESET button: reset DSP
BOOT LOAD switch (for internal use)
5
8
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7
16
17
18
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 RESET
SCB
FY 4106
18 BOOT LOAD
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-5
6. Operational Controls
6.1.6
STE-B1
SCANNER PIXEL FORMAT FY 4109
1 - 3 LEDs (3xgreen): +5V; –2V; –5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Interface (26 pin, male): Programmer interface
5 BOOT LED green: LCA reset; red: LCA boot; off: LCA loaded
6 TEMP LED red: excess temperature of board
7 GATES LED green: 1332 pixels / line;
red: Gate length not equal 1332 pixels per line
8 PULSES LED (SOL, SOF, SMI_REQ)
SPF
FY 4109
green: Reference pulses o.k.; red: one pulse is missing
6-6
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.1.7
MASTER CLOCK GENERATOR FY 4113
1
1 - 3 LEDs (3xgreen): +5V; –2V; –5V
2
3
4
4 Interface (26 pin, male): Programmer interface
5
5 BOOT LED green: LCA reset; red: LCA boot;
6
off: LCA loaded
6 TEMP LED red: excess temperature of board
7
MCG
FY 4113
7 TEST LED red: Test On; flashing red: No SOL
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-7
6. Operational Controls
6.1.8
STE-B1
ANALOG SIGNAL PROCESSING BOARD FY 4114
1
2
3
4
1 - 6 LEDs (6xgreen): analog +12V; +5V; –5V;
5
digital: +5V; –2V; –5V
6
7 Coaxial connector: CCD-Monitoring
7
8
9
8 CLP ERR ODD LED red:
Clamp error odd;
Monitoring Mode
9 CLP ERR EVEN LED red:
Clamp error even;
Monitoring Mode
10 Interface (26 pin, male): Programmer interface
11 BOOT LED green: LCA reset; red: LCA boot;
off: LCA loaded
10
12 TEMP LED red: excess temperature of board
13 CODING switch: Monitoring Mode
11
12
0 1
2
3
4
5
6
9 8
13
7
ASPR
FY 4114
F
E
D
C
B
A
6-8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
RACK 2
FILM PROCESSING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MON
FY 1408
Monitoring
IBD
FY 4210
Interface Board Demux
IBD
FY 4210
Interface Board Demux
SCC
FY 4209/29
Secondary Color Correction / or Bypass
FCC
FY 6211
Film Color Correction Chrom
FCC
FY 6211
Film Color Correction Chrom
ACR
FY 4206
Aperture Correction Format
FIS
FY 4205
Film Store
FPN
FY 1206
Fixed Pattern Noise
FDC
FY 4203
Film Deck Control
CSG
FY 6262
Capstan & Sprocket Pulse Generator
FCD
FY 4201
Film Clock Distribution
OPTION
6.2
16
Fig. 602:Overview boards rack 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
FY 4201.xx
FY 6262.xx
FY 4203.xx
FY 1206
FY 4205.xx
FY 4206.xx
FY 6211.xx
FY 6211.xx
FY 4209.xx
FY 4229
10. FY 4210.xx
11. FY 4210.xx
12.
13.
14.
15.
16. FY 1408.xx
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
Film Clock Distribution (FCD)
Capstan & Sprocket Pulse Generator (CSG)
Filmdeck Control (FDC)
Fixed Pattern Noise lum/chrom (FPN)
Film Store (FIS)
Aperture Correctur Reformatting (ACR)
Film Color Correction Chrominance (FCC)
Film Color Correction Chrominance (FCC)
6 Section Color Correction (6SC Option)
Bypass Secondary Color Correction
Interface Board Demux (IBD)
Interface Board Demux (IBD)
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Monitoring (MON)
6-9
6. Operational Controls
6.2.1
STE-B1
FILM CLOCK DISTRIBUTION FY 4201
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
2 - 4
3
LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE; (+5V; –2V; –5V)
4
5 LED (red): temperature warning (70oC) !
5
6
Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
7 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
FCD
FY 4201
7
6
6-10
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.2.2
CAPSTAN & SPROCKET PULSE GENERATOR FY 6262
1
1 - 5
2
6
LEDs (5x green): P12V; M12V; VCC; M2V; VEE
(+12V; –12V; +5V; –2V; –5V)
6
Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service terminal
7
Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
3
4
5
7
8 + 9
8
9
11 ON: film deck ready; 2V Ref.
11 flashing: filmdeck error
10 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
CSG
FY 6262
10
LEDs (2x yellow): 10 ON: capstan locked / 2V Film
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-11
6. Operational Controls
6.2.3
STE-B1
FILMDECK CONTROL FY 4203
1
1 Hex. switch telecine no.: not used!
2
2 LED (red): LCA configuration
3
3 LED (red): Flash valid
4
4 Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service terminal
5
5 - 7 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
6
7
8
8 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
9
9 Button 1: reset for MCK
*
10
FDC
FY 4203
*
6-12
10 Button 2: test for MCK (micro computer kernel)
hold button 2 and press button 1: starts MCK mon. progr. (service)
* Note:
Further LEDs on the p.c. board, see service manual.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.2.4
FIXED PATTERN NOISE FY 1206
1
1 Hex. switch 1: LSB
board version (for service use only)
2 Hex. switch 2: MSB
2
3 LED (red): LCA configuration
3
4
4 - 6 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
5
6
7 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
FPN
FY 1206
7
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-13
6. Operational Controls
6.2.5
STE-B1
FILM STORE FY 4205
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
2 D / G2
LED (green) on: init. o.k. (RSCI)
3 C / G3
Flashing LED (green) shows frame bank change activity
1
4 B / G2
Flashing LED (green) shows red data LSB activity
2
3
4
5 A / G5
Flashing LED (green) shows blue data LSB activity
5
6
7
6 - 9 LEDs (4x green): P3V3;VCC; M2V; VEE; (+3,3V;+5V; –2V; –5V)
8
9
10
11
11 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
12 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
FIS
FY 4205
12
10 LED (red): temperature warning (70oC) !
6-14
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.2.6
APERTURE CORRECTION FORMAT FY 4206
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
3
2 Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service terminal
3 - 6 LEDs (4x green): P3V3;VCC; M2V; VEE; (+3,3V;+5V; –2V; –5V; )
4
5
6
7 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
7
8 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
9
9 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
ACR
FY 4206
8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-15
6. Operational Controls
6.2.7
STE-B1
FILM COLOR CORRECTION CHROMINANCE FY 6211
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
3
2 - 4 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
4
5 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
5
6 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
7
7 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
FCC
FY 6211
6
6-16
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.2.8
BYPASS SECONDARY COLOR CORRECTION FY 4229
1
1 - 3
LEDs (4x green): VCC; M2V; VEE; (+5V; –2V; –5V)
2
Bypass
FY 4229
3
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-17
6. Operational Controls
6 SECTOR COLOR CORRECTION FY 4209 (OPTION)
OPTION
6.2.9
STE-B1
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
2
3
4
Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service terminal
3 - 6 LEDs (4x green): P3V3;VCC; M2V; VEE; (+3,3V;+5V; –2V; –5V; )
5
6
7
LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
8
8
Reset
9
9
Select
7
10
10 Display: Status massages for service purpose
11 Enter
12
12 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
SCC
FY 4209/29
11
6-18
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.2.10
INTERFACE BOARD DEMUX FY 4210
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2 LED (green) Internal Parity:
Error in signal processing
3 LED (green) TRS (IN-Signals):
Error in input signals
2
4 LED (green) Ref Pulses:
Error in reference pulses
3
4
5
5 - 7 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
6
7
8 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
8
9
10 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
IBD
FY 4210
10
9 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-19
6. Operational Controls
6.2.11
STE-B1
MONITORING FY 1408
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
3
4
2 - 7 LEDs (6x green): P5V; M5V; M12V; VCC; M2V; VEE
(–5V; –5V; –12V; +5V; –2V; –5V)
5
6
7
8 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
8
9
10 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
MON
FY 1408
10
9 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
6-20
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
2
4
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SPC
FY 6346
Spatial Process Ctrl.
OPTION
DOI
FY 4345
Data Output Interface
OPTION
HOA
FY 6314
HDTV Output Analog
HOD
FY 4313
HDTV Output Digital
SOI
FY 6312
SDTV Output
TVS
FY 6310
TV Store
TVS
FY 6310
TV Store
MCC
FY 6309
Matrix & Contour Corr.
GEN
FY 6338
OPTION
7
Genlock Generator
CSP
FY 6303
Conversion Spatial Processing
FY 6302/20
ESP
OPTION
5
Effect Spatial Processing or Conn Board
CSP
FY 6303
Conversion Spatial Processing
FY 6302/20
ESP
OPTION
3
Effect Spatial Processing or Conn Board
CSP
FY 6303
Conversion Spatial Processing
FY 6302/20
ESP
Effect Spatial Processing or Conn Board
FY 6301/21
SCA
Spatial Controller & Address
1
FILM POSTPROCESSING
OPTION
RACK 3
OPTION
6.3
16
Fig. 603:Overview boards rack 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
FY 6301.xx/FY 6321.xx
FY 6302.xx/FM 6320
FY 6303.xx
FY 6302.xx/FM 6320
FY 6303.xx
FY 6302.xx/FM 6320
FY 6303.xx
FY 6338.xx
FY 6309.xx
FY 6310.xx
FY 6310.xx
FY 6312.xx
FY 4313
FY 6314.xx
FY 4345.xx
FY 6346.xx
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
Spatial controller & Address with or w/o Rotation
Effect Spatial Processing or Connection Board 3
Conversion Spatial Processing
Effect Spatial Processing or Connection Board 3
Conversion Spatial Processing
Effect Spatial Processing or Connection Board 3
Conversion Spatial Processing
Genlock Generator
Matrix & Contour Correction
TV Store
TV Store
SDTV Output
HDTV Output Digital
HDTV Output Analog
Data Output Interface
Spatial Processor Control
6-21
6. Operational Controls
SPATIAL CONTROLLER & ADDRESS FY 6301 (w. Rotation)
SPATIAL CONTROLLER & ADDRESS FY 6321 (w.o. Rotation)
OPTION
6.3.1
STE-B1
1
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
2 LED (green): Sync o.k.
2
3
3 9 pin female:Programmer Interface RS 232
4
5
4 - 6 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
6
7
7 LED (red): temperature warning (70oC) !
8 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
9
9 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
SCA
FY 6301/21
8
6-22
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
EFFECT SPATIAL PROCESSING FY 6302 (w. Rotation)
Alternatively Connection Board FY 6320 (w.o. Rotation)
OPTION
6.3.2
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
2 - 5 LEDs (4x green):P3V3; VCC; M2V; VEE (+3,3V;+5V; –2V; –5V)
3
4
5
6 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
6
7 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out (FY 6302)
8
8 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male) (FY 6302)
ESP
FY 6302/20
7
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-23
6. Operational Controls
6.3.3
STE-B1
CONVERSION SPATIAL PROCESSING FY 6303
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
2 - 5 LEDs (4x green): P3V3; VCC; M2V; VEE (+3,3V;+5V; –2V; –5V)
3
4
5
6 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
6
7 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
8
8 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
CSP
FY 6303
7
6-24
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.3.4
GENLOCK GENERATOR FY 6338
1 - 3 LEDs (3x yellow):
In case of
internal
Sync mode
OFF
ON
OFF
1
2
3
In case of
external
Sync mode
ON
ON
ON
4
G1
G1
ON =
OFF =
external Sync available
no external Sync
G2
G2
ON =
OFF =
Oscillator running
Error
G3
G3
ON =
OFF =
Board locked to external Sync
Board unlocked
5
4 - 7
7
LEDs (4x yellow):
TV standard (encoded, LED 4 = LSB / LED 7 =MSB)
8
LED
6
9
10
11
12
13
7654
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1920 x 1080 L /
525 L /
1250 L /
625 L /
1125 L /
EDTV 625 L /
1125 L /
EDTV 525 L /
1920 x 1080 L /
625 L 8:4:4 /
DATA MODE
525 L 8:4:4 /
1280 x 720 L /
–
1280 x 720 L /
–
59.94i
59.94 i
50.00 i
50.00 i
60.00 i
50.00 i
59.94 i
59.94 i
60.00 i
50.00 i
or
1920 x 1080 L / 25.00 P
or
1920 x 1080 L / 50.00 i
or
1920 x 1080 L / 24.00 P
or
1920 x 1080 L / 23.98 P
or
1920 x 1080 L / 24.00 sF
or
1920 x 1080 L / 23.98 sF
59.94 i
60.00 p
59.94 p
8 - 11 LEDs (4x green): P15V; VCC; M2V; VEE
(+15V; +5V; –2V; –5V)
12 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
13 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
14
GEN
FY 6338
14 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-25
6. Operational Controls
6.3.5
STE-B1
MATRIX & CONTOUR CORRECTION FY 6309
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2 - 4 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
2
3
4
5 LED (red): temperature warning (70oC) !
5
6 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
7
7 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
MCC
FY 6309
6
6-26
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
6.3.6
TV STORE FY 6310
1
1
2
2 - 4
3
LED (red): LCA configuration
LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
4
5
LED (red): temperature warning (70oC) !
6
6
Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
7
7
Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
TVS
FY 6310
5
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-27
6. Operational Controls
6.3.7
STE-B1
SDTV OUTPUT FY 6312
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
2 - 4 LEDs (3x green): Analog P5V; M5V; M12V (+5V; –5V; –12V)
3
4
5
5 - 7 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
6
7
8 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
8
9
10 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
SOI
FY 6312
10
9 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
6-28
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
HDTV OUTPUT DIGITAL FY 4313 (OPTION)
OPTION
6.3.8
1
1
LED (red): LCA configuration
2
2 - 4
3
LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
4
5
LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
6
6
Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
7
7 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
HOD
FY 4313
5
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-29
6. Operational Controls
HDTV OUTPUT ANALOG FY 6314 (OPTION)
OPTION
6.3.9
STE-B1
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2
2 - 4 LEDs (3x green): Analog P5V; M5V; M12V (+5V; –5V; –12V)
3
4
5
5 - 7 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
6
7
8 LED (red) temperature warning (70oC) !
8
9
10 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
HOA
FY 6314
10
9 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
6-30
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6. Operational Controls
STE-B1
DATA OUTPUT INTERFACE FY 4345 (OPTION)
OPTION
6.3.10
1 LED (red): LCA configuration
1
2 LED (red): Restart
2
3
3 9 pin female: Programmer Interface RS232
4
4 - 6 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
5
6
7 LED (red): temperature warning (70oC) !
7
8 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
9
9 Programmer Interface (26 pin, male)
DOI
FY 4345
8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
6-31
6. Operational Controls
6.3.11
STE-B1
SPATIAL PROCESSOR CONTROL FY 6346
1
1 Hex-switch not used
2 LED (red): LCA configuration
3 LED (red): Flash valid
2
3
4
4 Interface (9 pin, female): RS232 interface for service terminal
5
5 - 7 LEDs (3x green): VCC; M2V; VEE (+5V; –2V; –5V)
6
7
8 LED (red): temperature warning (70oC) !
8
9
9 Interface (40 pin, male): test point signals out
*
10
10 Button 1: test for MCK (microcomputer kernel)
11
11 Button 2: reset for MCK
hold button 2 and press button 1: starts MCK monitor program (service)
SPC
FY 6346
*
6-32
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7.
7. Interfaces
INTERFACES
Overview
Remote Diagnosis PC
incl. PC DUO Remote Control Tool
Modem
Graphical Control Panel
Diagnosis PC
incl. SDCMAINT
and PC DUO Remote
Control Tool
Telephone Line
Telecine Controller
Prev
Ctrl
Modem
Cheapernet
Interface
Controller
Interface
10Base T
10Base T
Extern aux
RJ45 Terminal Panel
External Connections
Internal Connections
10Base 2
10BASEĆT Network Ports
10BASE2/AUI BACKBONE PORT
Port 8
MDI
MDIĆX
AUI
OFFON
Port 7 Port 6 Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
TERMINATOR
10BASE2
AUI
OFF
10BASE2 ON
BACKBONE
MEDIA
SELECT ENABLE
Micro HUB AT-MR820TR
10Base T
10Base T
10Base T
Editor Out Extern aux
IMCS 1
IMCS 1
Analog Signal
Control
Spatial Processor
Control
Film Deck Control
I2 C
RSCI
RSCI
Rack 1 Boards
IMCS 1
RSCI
Shadow Telecine
Rack 3
Boards
Rack 2 Boards
HIPPI
Data Out
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
LTC In
LTC Out
Rack 3
Data Output
Fig. 701:
GPI Remote 6
Local Control
Panel
Key Code In
Rack 2
Sepmag Out
Rack 1
7-1
7. Interfaces
7.1
STE-B1
RJ45/IMCS (INTERNAL MACHINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM)
Fig. 702: RJ45/iMCS on Terminal Panel
Cheapernet
system
The main components of the control system are connected via the serial IMCS bus
system with each other (IMCS = internal machine communication system).
This bus is based on Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3.
The participants in the IMCS 1 system are:
Rack 1
Analog Signal Control
Rack 2
Film Deck Control
Gateway Control (optional)
Rack 3
Spatial Processor Control
The Graphical Control Panel, various telecine controllers and a diagnostics PC can
be accommodated within the IMCS net via RJ45 connectors on Terminal Panel.
ANSI
standard
7-2
Standard
Data rate
Max. cable length
Cable type
Connector
IEEE 802.3
10 MBit/sec
max. 100 m
STP/UTP Category 3 or better
RJ45
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7.2
7. Interfaces
REMOTE SYSTEMS / RJ45/iMCS
Remote Interfaces overview
Remote
Units
REM 4 *
D-sub connector
9 pin female
MAU** 1 - 3
RJ45 connections
Terminal Panel
10Base-T
MAU** 4
RJ45 connection
Terminal Panel
RS422
Interface
REM 5 *
D-sub connector
9 pin female
REM 6
D-sub connector
25 pin female
RS422
Interface
GPI
Parallel
Micro HUB
RJ45/iMCS 1
10Base-T
10Base-T
10Base-T
Protocol Sony
RJ45 connection (J 38)
Film Deck Controller
Rack 2
RJ45 connection (J 22)
Controller
Rack 1
RJ45 connection (J 51)
Controller
Rack 3
* = for future use!
** MAU = Medium Attachment Unit
Fig. 703: Remote Systems RJ45/IMCS, RS 422 and GPI
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-3
7. Interfaces
7.3
STE-B1
REMOTE CONTROL OF WAVEFORM MONITORING J3,J4 / RACK 2
Output drivers:
Opto Coupler PC 354
Open Collector
Control Outputs electrically insulated from the telecine
Pull–up resistors are in the particular Waveform Monitor
GND Pin 9 is connected via 1M resistor to telecine
ground
Waveform Monitoring FY 1408
Connection Cable
+
(maximum 50 m)
Pull-up
PC 354
Pinning
see table above
7.4
EXAMPLES FOR THE CONNECTION TO THE COLOR CORRECTOR
Diagram for the connection to a differential RS 422 receiver
+ 5V
Telecine
+ 5V
Color Corrector
A
B
Diagram for the connection to a TTL receiver
+ 5V
+ 5V
Telecine
Color Corrector
A
Common
7-4
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
34 s
t.b.d.
Fig. 704: Timing SOF_Film pulse:
t =34 sec in all modes
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-5
7. Interfaces
7.5
STE-B1
DESCRIPTION OF BI PHASE SIGNAL, SOF PULSE AND CFR OUT PULSE
BI Phase
R & S Signal
configurable to 10x Bi Phase (250/240 Hz) or
2x Bi Phase ( 50/ 40 Hz) or
1x Bi Phase ( 25/ 24 Hz)
See Functional Control Panel FCP Chapter 4 Setup menu, Setup Genlock, Sepmag coupling.
R Signal
H
L
S signal
Fig. 705: BI Phase Signal
Output parameter:
transistor collector output with 1k ohm pull–up to +5V
UCE = 40V max
IC = 10mA max
UCEsat = 0.2V
SOF Signal
(Pulldown)
SOF (Start of frame) e. g. used for EVERTZ film footage encoder 4025.
TTL Output drive: 74 FCT 2244
Fig. 706: SOF output driver
More details, see also figure 704 and figure 709
7-6
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
Color Frame Reference
CFR Out Pulse
TTL Outputdrive: 74 FCT 244 ASO
47 Fig. 707: CFR output driver
V_Studio
CFR OUT
SOF 48 fps
1
1
SOF 30 fps
2
SOF 24 fps
2
SOF 18 fps
SOF 12 fps
SOF 6 fps
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
1
5
4
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
3
5
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
4
3
5
5
10
10
525 / 60 – Timing
Fig. 708: Coarse Timing CFR OUT Pulse 525
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-7
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
Fixed speeds except SAS fit into 8V /50 Hz or 10V /60 Hz sequences. The figure 709 shows the pull down sequences for the 525 / 60 Hz and 625 / 50 Hz mode.
50 Hz System
SDTV–Sync
Field 1
SOF (Pulldown)
1.5 lines
CFR
510 s at SDTV, EDTV, 8:4:4
223 s at HDTV 1250
60 Hz System
SDTV–Sync
Field 1
SOF (Pulldown)
1.5 lines
CFR
505 s at SDTV, EDTV, 8:4:4
47 s at HDTV 1250, 1080
Fig. 709: Timing CFR OUT Pulse
7-8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7.6
7. Interfaces
DATA OUTPUT INTERFACE FY 4345
Overview
This chapter outlines the basic approach for data transfer between the Shadow
Telecine and a computer system.
Data conversion
modes
The following data conversion modes are supported:
1. ”TVLEV”
Image data maintains the TV video levels:
black level
64d (10 bit)
white level
940d (10 bit)
within a total range of
0 - 1023d (10 bit)
2. ”GRLEV”
Image data is mapped to graphic video levels
black level
0d
white level
1023d (10 bit)
within a total range of
0 - 1023d (10 bit)
3. ”DXR”
Printing density characteristic for
CINEON DXR (Digital Extended Range) files
- e. g. used for post production systems like Inferno / Fire
(Discreet Logic) or Domino (Quantel) which captures the dynamic range of NEG films.
4. ”TV_PD”
Images, color graded on a TV monitor, are mapped to Printing
Density characteristic for CINEON DXR files
- e. g. used for post production systems like Inferno / Fire
(Discreet Logic) or Domino (Quantel).
5. ”DXR-G”
Printing density characteristic for CINEON DXR files, which
captures the dynamic range of NEG films.
In addition to the DXR mode, the DXR-G mode provides a
closer color matching to the Kodak Genesis scanner.
6. ”TV-G”
Images, color graded on a TV monitor, are mapped to Printing
Density characteristic for CINEON DXR files.
In addition to the TV_PD mode, the TV-G mode provides a
closer color matching to the Kodak Genesis scanner.
7. “C-PD”
Cineon Print Density
This logarithmic characteristic is close to the ideal Cineon print
density characteristic. The density range is from 0 to 2.0.
In addition to the TV_PD mode, the TV-G mode provides a
closer color matching to the Kodak Genesis scanner.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-9
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
Data Transfer via Shadow Telecine HIPPI Channel
In general the HIPPI channel will be treated like a video channel. It is assumed that
the receiving device is able to cope with the amount of data. Therefore the operator
has to select the film speed which is appropriate for the application.
The maximum data rate via the HIPPI channel will be 100 MB/s.
The lowest film speed for continuous film transport will be: 3 film frames / s
The resolution can be selected.
Horizontal
= 256 ... 2048 pixel,
Vertical
= 256 ... 1832 lines
The amount of data depends on film format.
D Data is RGB or Y only selectable
D Color sequence is R G B or B G R selectable.
D Special mode for key channel transfer.
Maximum pixel resolution is 10 bits. The scale can be logarithmic or linear (selectable).
General handling of Data
D For every film frame a HIPPI-FP packet is generated.
D HIPPI-FP packets consist of Header-Area and D2-Area. There is no D1-Area.
D The first 8K block within the D2-Area is reserved for file or image information.
D Image information always begins at the first 8K boundary of the D2 area (= DPX
recommendation).
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HIPPI I_Field
1 x 32 bit
HIPPI Header_Area
= 2 x 32 bit
File header (DPX or TIFF) = 8192 Byte
0x0000....0x1FFF
Image-Data .....
0x2000.....
D File information will correspond to SMPTE 268M DPX file format, see also
notes on page 10-9. All core information will be provided.
7-10
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
Shadow Telecine Data Output
Parallel Interface
Standard
The physical interface follows the HIPPI-PH standard (High-performance parallel
interface, mechanical, electrical and signalling protocol specification ANSI X3.183
- 1991, New York).
Serial Interface
Standard
The serial interface operates according to the HIPPI Serial Specifications ANSI
X3.300-1997, using HIPPI-PH compatible signalling sequence and protocol (ANSI
X3.183-1991).
The protocol of data transfer follows the HIPPI-FP standard (High-performance
parallel interface, framing protocol ANSI X3.210-1992).
Data Format
The interface is 32 bits wide. Organization is shown in figure 710. Normally a HIPPIFP packet consists of three areas: header_, D1_ and D2_Area. In general the
D1_Area is needed to exchange control information via the HIPPI channel. In the
telecine the data output is controlled over a separate interface according to the
Ethernet standard with an IP/UDP protocol so that the D1_Area is dropped.
In the HIPPI-FP packet, the byte order is opposite to the bit-significance of the
32bit-word, i.e. byte 0 is located in the bits 24...31 and byte 3 in the bits 0...7. Independent from this order the byte order of the image data in the D2_Area is determined by a switch in the header area of the image data (magic number in DPX files).
The following explanations refer to the items in the packet format (figure 710).
D ULP-id:
bit 24...31, id for Upper Layer Protocol, this information can
be configured via the control system : default = 10000000;
(1xxxxxxx = locally assigned)
D P:
bit 23, D1_Data_Set_Present, set to 0.
D B:
bit 22, Start_D2_on_Burst_Boundary, set to 0 (D2_Area
may start at or before beginning of second burst of the
packet, burst = 256 words = 1kbyte).
D D1_Area_Size:
bit 3...10, no D1_Area present, set to 0.
D D2_Offset:
bit 0...2, no offset, data-set begins at start of D2_Area, set
to 0.
D D2_Size:
32 bits, length in bytes of the data in D2_Area except of fillbytes at the end (0 D2_Size 4GBytes-2).
D D2_Area:
starts and ends on an 64-bit boundary, filled at the end in
case of need.
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-11
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
Contents of I-field
D For Data Output FY 4345.11 and higher
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BYTE 0
BYTE 1
BYTE 2
BYTE 3
0x03
0x00
0x00
variable*
* = set via Graphical Control Panel; menu TK Config - submenu
Data - Destination
Note:
1. destination routing
2. camp on
3. dest = 1
4. src = 0
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BYTE 0
BYTE 1
BYTE 2
BYTE 3
bit
31
23
15
7
Header_
ULP-id
P B
Reserved
Area
D2_Size
Area
D2_Area
D2_Data_Set
D1_Area_Size
D2_
Offset
Fig. 710: HIPPI-FP packet format
HIPPI Connection Model
Datagram Mode and Stream Mode are supported. This mode can be selected via
the control system (GCP - TK Config menu - submenu Data - connection mode).
Details of Stream Mode:
Single connection, multiple packets.
The telecine sets up a single connection and sends multiple PACKETS on that connection (REQUEST/CONNECT)
Details of the Datagram Mode:
Single Connection, single Packet.
Telecine sets up a single connection (REQUEST/CONNECT) and
sends one PACKET on that connection.
After the transmission of the packet the connection is released. (REQUEST/CONNECT/DISCONNECT)
One PACKET is always one film-frame.
One standard burst consists of 256 * 32 bit data. The single allowed “Shortburst”
will always be the last burst of a packet.
7-12
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
Image data format
The image data is always placed in the D2_ Data_ Set.
Address 0 - 1FFFH reserved for DPX or TIFF header.
Address 2000H ... : start of image data.
For the transfer of digital component data into the 32-bit-HIPPI-channel six selectable modes are provided, illustrated in chapter 7.6.1.
Selectable Modes 1 - 6
1. 3*8 bit + key - channel
2. 3*10 bit
3. 3*10 bit + key-channel expanded to 4*16 bit
(1pixel in 2 HIPPI-Words)
4. 3*10 bit Y - only
(3 pixel per HIPPI-Word)
5. 2 *10 bit expanded to 2 * 16 bit (Lum only)
(2 pixel in 1 HIPPI-Word )
6. 3 * 10 bit key-channel
(3 pixel per HIPPI-Word)
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-13
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
Image DPX Data Format
The relevant information of the embedded keycode are described in the fields
43 - 48 and 76.16 - 76.21.
The standardized format is shown in the following tables.
DPX - SMPTE 268M header information
Field
Offset
Length
Type
Name
1
0
4
U32
magic number
Content
2
4
4
U32
offset to image data
3
8
8
ASCII
version number of header format
4
16
4
U32
total image file size in bytes
6
24
4
U32
generic sect. length
1664 as default
7
28
4
U32
industry sect. length
384 as default
6144 as default
0x53445058 (ASCII-code of ″SDPX″)
0x00002000 (8k) bytes
V1.0
size of(element_1) + 0x2000 /*header*/
8
32
4
U32
user-def. sect. length
15
660
4
U32
Encryption key
17
768
2
U16
image orientation
18
770
2
U16
no. of image elements
19
772
4
U32
pixels per line
x-value of reproduction format
20
776
4
U32
lines per image
y-value of reproduction format
21
780
21.1
780
4
U32
data sign
21.2
784
4
U32
reference low
21.3
788
4
R32
reference low quantity
21.4
792
4
U32
reference high
21.5
796
4
R32
reference high quantity
21.6
800
1
U8
descriptor
4 = (Key-only)
6 = (Y-Only)
50 = (R,G,B)
51 = (R,G,B,key)
151 = (B,G,R)
152 = (B,G,R,key)
21.7
801
1
U8
transfer characteristic
0 = user defined
1 = printing dens or
2 = linear
3 log
21.8
802
1
U8
colorimetric spec.
0 = user defined or
1 = printing dens or
2 = not applicable
21.9
803
1
U8
bit size
7-14
0xFFFFFFFF
0 as default
always 1
image element 1
0 (unsigned)
8bit = 0
10bit = 0
16bit = 0 as default
0 as default (float)
8bit = 255
10bit = 1023
16bit = 65535
2.047 as default (float)
mode 1:
mode 2, 4, 6:
mode 3, 5:
8
10
16
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
DPX User defined data
Field
Offset
Length
Type
Name
21.10
804
2
U16
packing
Content
mode 1, 3, 5:
mode 2, 4, 6:
0
1
(packed into 32bit words)
(filled into 32bit words)
--- notes --1-HIPPI-Word sequence in 8 bit mode
31...24: R
23...16: G
15...08: B
07...00: key
2-HIPPI-Word sequence in 16 bit mode
word n:
31...16: R
15...00: G
word n+1
31...16: B
15...00: key
the SMPTE DPX header uses for the 3*10bit mode a
“right justified” notation of the 30bits. In order to be
compatible with Kodak CINEON images the notation
“left justified” is used for RGB images instead
bits:
31..22 : R
21..12 : G
11..02 : B
01..00 : spare
Y-only images are according to DPX !!!
31...30 : spare
29...20 : Yn+3
19...10 : Yn+2
09...00 : Yn+1
21.11
806
2
U16
encoding
0
21.12
808
4
U32
offset to data
0x00002000
21.15
812
4
U32
end of line padding
0 by default
21.15
816
4
U32
end of image padding
0 by default
21.15
820
32
ASCII
description
gap
41
1628
8
2*U32
pixel aspect
Horizontal: vertical
gap
43
1664
2
ASCII
Film manufacturer ID
2 digits of film edge code
44
1666
2
ASCII
Film type ID
2 digits of film edge code
45
1668
2
ASCII
Frame offset
2 digits of film edge code
47
1670
6
ASCII
Prefix (film reel ID)
2 digits of film edge code
48
1676
4
ASCII
Count (film length i. feet)
2 digits of film edge code
gap
50
1712
4
U32
position in sequence
actual filmtimer value
gap
58
1920
4
U32
SMPTE timecode
film keycode in case
59
1924
4
U32
SMPTE user bits
film keycode in case
61
1929
1
U8
field number
gap
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-15
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
DPX User defined data
Field
Offset
Length
Type
Name
Content
75
2048
32
ASCII
User identification
76.1
2080
4
ASCII
User Magic Number
”Thomson – SHADOW TELECINE”
76.2
2084
1
U8
Board Type
76.3
2085
1
U8
FirmwareVersion ID
76.4
2086
1
U8
Protocol Version ID
for user defined header area
Thomson internal Data
76.5
2087
1
U8
Future Use
Tbd
Thomson internal Data
76.6
2084
4
U32
Shadow Status
76.7
2088
1
U8
Data–Board
Transfer Function
Thomson internal Data
00h = standard log
01h = linear
02h = TV–Log
03h = DXR–Log
04h = future use
05h = future use
06h = future use
07h = future use
76.8
2093
1
U8
Shadow
Transfer Function
Thomson internal Data
Bit 0: CRT–GAMMA
0 = OFF
1 = ON
76.9
2090
1
U8
Primary Modes
(Color Correction)
Thomson internal Data
”PDPX”
identifies that this is a valid UD–header
Thomson internal Data
00 = FY6315
01 = FY4345
Thomson internal Data
Same Number as on control panel
Bit 0..1
00 = don’t care
01 = output mode transfer
02 = output mode display
03 = output mode continues
Bit 15...2 undocumented
Bit 2..0: primary mode
00: print positive
01: intermediate positive
02: print negative
03: color negative
04: primetime negative
05: primetime positive
06: intermediate negative
07: color positive
76.10
2095
1
U8
Tbd
76.11
2096
2
U16
Linear low reference value
Thomson internal Data
0: for Video Levels
64: for Graphic Levels
76.12
2098
2
U16
Linear high reference value
Thomson internal Data
940: for Video Levels
1023: for Graphic Levels
76.13
2100
2
U16
Steadiness X–Vector
Thomson internal Data
Default = 0x8000 (1 unit = 1/100µm)
76.14
2102
2
U16
Steadiness Y–Vector
Thomson internal Data
Default = 0x8000 (1 unit = 1/100µm)
76.15
2104
1
U8
Optic Type
7-16
Tbd
Thomson internal Data
00:
01:
02:
03:
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
DPX User defined data
Field
Offset
Length
Type
Name
76.16
2105
1
U8
Future Use
Tbd
76.17
2106
2
U16
Future Use
Steadiness Rotation Angle
76.18
2108
2
U16
H–Scanning area
Thomson internal Data
1 unit = 1µm
76.19
2110
2
U16
V–Scanning area
Thomson internal Data
1unit = 1µm
76.20
2112
2
U16
Center Position X
Thomson internal Data
1unit = 1µm
76.21
2114
2
U16
Center Position Y
Thomson internal Data
1unit = 1µm
76.22
..
..
..
Future Use
TBD
76.xx
2559
1
U8
Future Use
TBD
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
Content
Thomson internal Data
Thomson internal Data
Rotation angle (0x8000 = 0°)
0..360° = 0x0000...0xffff
Last element of SHADOW generated User Data
7-17
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)1
The second image file header format provided by Shadow Telecine is TIFF, mostly
used in consumer applications. The maximal length is 4 GBytes. A TIFF file begins
with an 8-byte image file header that points to an image file directory (IFD) containing information about the image and pointers to the image data.
This TIFF header implementation is based on :
TIFF Revision 6.0
Final - June3,1992
The TIFF header can only be used together with the
D 4 * 8 bit RGB+key mode
D 4 * 16 bit RGB+key mode
All other modes are not supported by the current implementation of most readers
and not noted in any standard release.
The following drawing shows the TIFF structure.
Fig. 711:
1. TIFF Revision 6.0, June 3, 1992, Aldus co., Seattle
7-18
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
TIFF image file header
Bytes
Name
Content
0,1
byte order
″MM″ (0x4d4d), big-endian
2,3
TIFF ID
42
4...7
offset in bytes of first IFD
= 10
8...9
gap
random number
10...11
number of tags
= 15
12......
start of IFDs
see IFDs
TIFF image file directory (IFD)
Bytes
Name
Content
0,1
Tag (field id)
16-bit number
2,3
field type
1 = BYTE
2 = ASCII
3 = SHORT
4 = LONG
5 = RATIONAL
4...7
Count
8...11
Value/Offset
no. of values of indicated type
value if <= 4bytes otherwise file
offset (in bytes) to value
The following table shows the required fields for R,G,B,Alpha full color images.
Shadow doesn’t provide breaking an image into several strips, so the number of
StripOffsets (tags 273) and StripByteCounts (tag 279) is one and RowsPerStrip
(tag 278) corresponds to ImageLength.
IFD of RGB full color image
Tag
Name
Type
Count
Value(s)
255
New SubfileType
LONG
1
1
256
ImageWidth
SHORT/LONG
1
no. of pixels per scanline
257
ImageLength
SHORT/LONG
1
no. of scanlines
258
BitsPerSample
SHORT
SamplesPerPixel
8/16
259
Compression
SHORT
1
1 (no)
262
Photometric
Interpretation
SHORT
1
2 (=RGB)
256
Fill Order
SHORT/LONG
1
no. of pixels per scanline
273
StripOffsets
SHORT/LONG
1
byte offset of image data from beginning of file
277
SamplesPerPixel
SHORT
1
4 (R,G,B,key)
278
RowsPerStrip
SHORT/LONG
1
ImageLength
279
StripByteCounts
SHORT/LONG
1
ImageWidth*ImageLength* SamplesPerPixel*
(BitsPerSample/2)
282
XResolution
RATIONAL
1
235,176 = random no. of pixels per resolution unit
horizontal
283
YResolution
RATIONAL
1
235,176 = random no. of pixels per resolution unit
vertical
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-19
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
IFD of RGB full color image
Tag
Name
Type
Count
Value(s)
296
ResolutionUnit
SHORT
1
2 (= no absolute measurement)
296
Extra Samples
SHORT
1
2 ( = Unassociated ALPHA Data)
Note:
Not all TIFF readers can read R, G, B, Alpha images.
The following software packages can read Shadow TIFF files:
D imgview of SGI - IRIX 6.2 can read 4*8 bit R, G ,B, Alpha and 4*16 bit
R, G, B, Alpha but not 16 bit greyscale images.
D polyview for Windows 95 can read 16 bit greyscale images but no R G B images with 4 components.
7-20
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
7. Interfaces
7.6.1
PIXEL ASSIGNMENT TO THE 32 BIT HIPPI DATA BUS
Mode 0
Mode 1
Mode 2
4x8Bit RGBK
3x10Bit RGB
4x16Bit RGBK
HIPPIWORD, BIT#
HIPPIWORD, BIT#
PIXEL M
HIPPIWORD N
PIXEL M
HIPPIWORD N+1
RED 9
31
RED 9
31
RED 15
31
BLUE 15
31
RED 8
30
RED 8
30
RED 14
30
BLUE 14
30
RED 7
29
RED 7
29
RED 13
29
BLUE 13
29
RED 6
28
RED 6
28
RED 12
28
BLUE 12
28
RED 5
27
RED 5
27
RED 11
27
BLUE 11
27
RED 4
26
RED 4
26
RED 10
26
BLUE 10
26
RED 3
25
RED 3
25
RED 9
25
BLUE 9
25
RED 2
24
RED 2
24
RED 8
24
BLUE 8
24
GREEN 9
23
RED 1
23
RED 7
23
BLUE 7
23
GREEN 8
22
RED 0
22
RED 6
22
BLUE 6
22
GREEN 7
21
GREEN 9
21
RED 5
21
BLUE 5
21
GREEN 6
20
GREEN 8
20
RED 4
20
BLUE 4
20
GREEN 5
19
GREEN 7
19
RED 3
19
BLUE 3
19
GREEN 4
18
GREEN 6
18
RED 2
18
BLUE 2
18
GREEN 3
17
GREEN 5
17
RED 1
17
BLUE 1
17
GREEN 2
16
GREEN 4
16
RED 0
16
BLUE 0
16
BLUE 9
15
GREEN 3
15
GREEN 15
15
KEY 15
15
BLUE 8
14
GREEN 2
14
GREEN 14
14
KEY 14
14
BLUE 7
13
GREEN 1
13
GREEN 13
13
KEY 13
13
BLUE 6
12
GREEN 0
12
GREEN 12
12
KEY 12
12
BLUE 5
11
BLUE 9
11
GREEN 11
11
KEY 11
11
BLUE 4
10
BLUE 8
10
GREEN 10
10
KEY 10
10
BLUE 3
9
BLUE 7
9
GREEN 9
9
KEY 9
9
BLUE 2
8
BLUE 6
8
GREEN 8
8
KEY 8
8
KEY 9
7
BLUE 5
7
GREEN 7
7
KEY 7
7
KEY 8
6
BLUE 4
6
GREEN 6
6
KEY 6
6
KEY 7
5
BLUE 3
5
GREEN 5
5
KEY 5
5
KEY 6
4
BLUE 2
4
GREEN 4
4
KEY 4
4
KEY 5
3
BLUE 1
3
GREEN 3
3
KEY 3
3
KEY 4
2
BLUE 0
2
GREEN 2
2
KEY 2
2
KEY 3
1
0
1
GREEN 1
1
KEY 1
1
KEY 2
0
0
0
GREEN 0
0
KEY 0
0
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
7-21
7. Interfaces
STE-B1
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
3x10Bit Y-Only
2x16Bit Y-Only
3x10Bit K-Only
3 PIXELS
HIPPIWORD, BIT#
2 PIXELS
HIPPIWORD, BIT#
3 PIXELS
HIPPIWORD, BIT#
0
31
Y 15 [N+1]
31
0
31
0
30
Y 14 [N+1]
30
0
30
Y 9 [N+2]
29
Y 13 [N+1]
29
KEY 9 [N+2]
29
Y 8 [N+2]
28
Y 12 [N+1]
28
KEY 8 [N+2]
28
Y 7 [N+2]
27
Y 11 [N+1]
27
KEY 7 [N+2]
27
Y 6 [N+2]
26
Y 10 [N+1]
26
KEY 6 [N+2]
26
Y 5 [N+2]
25
Y 9 [N+1]
25
KEY 5 [N+2]
25
Y 4 [N+2]
24
Y 8 [N+1]
24
KEY 4 [N+2]
24
Y 3 [N+2]
23
Y 7 [N+1]
23
KEY 3 [N+2]
23
Y 2 [N+2]
22
Y 6 [N+1]
22
KEY 2 [N+2]
22
Y 1 [N+2]
21
Y 5 [N+1]
21
KEY 1 [N+2]
21
Y 0 [N+2]
20
Y 4 [N+1]
20
KEY 0 [N+2]
20
Y 9 [N+1]
19
Y 3 [N+1]
19
KEY 9 [N+1]
19
Y 8 [N+1]
18
Y 2 [N+1]
18
KEY 8 [N+1]
18
Y 7 [N+1]
17
Y 1 [N+1]
17
KEY 7 [N+1]
17
Y 6 [N+1]
16
Y 0 [N+1]
16
KEY 6 [N+1]
16
Y 5 [N+1]
15
Y 15 [N]
15
KEY 5 [N+1]
15
Y 4 [N+1]
14
Y 14 [N]
14
KEY 4 [N+1]
14
Y 3 [N+1]
13
Y 13 [N]
13
KEY 3 [N+1]
13
Y 2 [N+1]
12
Y 12 [N]
12
KEY 2 [N+1]
12
Y 1 [N+1]
11
Y 11 [N]
11
KEY 1 [N+1]
11
Y 0 [N+1]
10
Y 10 [N]
10
KEY 0 [N+1]
10
Y 9 [N]
9
Y 9 [N]
9
KEY 9 [N]
9
Y 8 [N]
8
Y 8 [N]
8
KEY 8 [N]
8
Y 7 [N]
7
Y 7 [N]
7
KEY 7 [N]
7
Y 6 [N]
6
Y 6 [N]
6
KEY 6 [N]
6
Y 5 [N]
5
Y 5 [N]
5
KEY 5 [N]
5
Y 4 [N]
4
Y 4 [N]
4
KEY 4 [N]
4
Y 3 [N]
3
Y 3 [N]
3
KEY 3 [N]
3
Y 2 [N]
2
Y 2 [N]
2
KEY 2 [N]
2
Y 1 [N]
1
Y 1 [N]
1
KEY 1 [N]
1
Y 0 [N]
0
Y 0 [N]
0
KEY 0 [N]
0
7-22
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
8.
8. First Setup
FIRST SETUP
This chapter describes startup of the Shadow Telecine, including the following sections:
H Installation check
H Power on
H Basic check of the telecine
H Control of the reference signal
Attention:
For initial installation of the Shadow Telecine, observe the order of following
sections.
8.1
INSTALLATION CHECK
1. Ventilation
Take care that the incoming air can circulate free.
Details see chapter 4.5 ”Space requirements and environmental conditions”.
2. Check internal p.c. board positions
Visual check only!
Check, that all boards from Rack 1 to Rack 3 are tightly fitted in their respective
sockets.
3. Check internal connections of the telecine cabinet
Visual check only!
Check, that all plugs are fitted to the correct sockets.
If necessary, plug in loose cables into the sockets according to their label.
4. Check external connections of the telecine
Check the outputs for video and audio (option), reference signals and IMCS
connections as described in chapter 5 ”Connections” and chapter 3 ”System
Applications”.
5. Check installation of the Local Control Panel
Details, see chapter 4.7 “Installing Local Control Panel”
6. Check installation of the front door handles
Details, see chapter 4.8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
8-1
8. First Setup
STE-B1
7. Check installation of the Graphical Control Panel
Details, see chapter 4.9 ”Installation GCP” and the separate GCP manual
8. Check the connections of the Micro Hub
ATTENTION!
The internal machine communication system iMCS is based on the RJ45
interface.
ON
The TERMINATOR of the 10Base2 port of the Micro Hub must be set to
“ON” - and an 50W terminator added - if no external device is connected!
TERMINATOR
50W
10BASE2
10Base2 port
unconnected
Set TERMINATOR to “ON” -without additional 50W - if the port is one end
of a control bus.
Set TERMINATOR to “OFF” if the control bus is connected via BNC T-connector. Details, see chapter 5.6 “iMCS connections”
9. Check the removal of styrofoam elements
Details, see chapter 4.6.
10. Check if lenses, filters and lamp (illumination path) are inserted
Details, see chapter 4.11 “Mounting Lenses and Filters”
11. Check installing of Lens Gate Assembly LGA
Check if the appropriate Lens Gate Assembly (16 mm / 35 mm) matches the
telecine unit to the respective film format.
12. Remove possible “Effect Filter” from the LGA
Take care that no “Optical Effect Filter” is installed within the Lens Gate Assembly. For the usage of these filters, see chapter 3 in the “Operation Instructions”
13. Connect Gateblast Air Compressor
See chapter 4.10 in this manual
14. Check mains voltage
The voltage for operation is marked on the type label at the rear of the Telecine
cabinet and should be checked against the actual mains voltage before switching on. Details see chapter 4.13 ”Mains Connection” in this manual.
TYPE
PART/SER.NO.
POWER AC
STE B1
000 128 580 000 / 099
3W+N+PE
120/208 V: 11A , 13A , 19A
1W+N+PE
FREQUENCY
230/400 V: 6A, 6A10A
–
/200 V: 23A
–
/230 V: 20A
–
/240 V: 19A
N4067
47 – 63 Hz
This device complies with part15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This devise may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Fig. 801: Type label of Shadow telecine for 230 Mains Voltage -Europe Version
at the rear side of the telecine cabinet
8-2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
8. First Setup
TYPE
STE B1
PART/SER.NO.
000 128 580 000 / 099
POWER AC
3W+N+PE / 120/208 V / 11A. 13A. 19A.
FREQUENCY
47 – 63 Hz
Listed
Professional Video Equipment
3S13
This device complies with part15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This devise may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Fig. 802: Type label of Shadow telecine for 120 Mains Voltage - UL version at the rear side of the telecine cabinet
TYPE
STE B1
PART/SER.NO.
000 128 580 000 / 099
POWER AC
2W+PE – / 208 V / 22 A
FREQUENCY
47 – 63 Hz
Listed
Professional Video Equipment
3S13
This device complies with part15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This devise may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Fig. 803: Type label of Shadow telecine for 208 Mains Voltage - UL version at the rear side of the telecine cabinet
15. Earthing requirements
PE
TE
1. Earthing with the protective earth has to be executed with the power cord
which contains the earthed protective conductor PE (normally).
The earth conductor has to be connected to the PE screw terminal
within the line filter!
2. The additional protective earth has to be connected to the central PE
screw at the power terminal unit as earth conductor with large cross
section!
3. The jumper TE –– PE must not be broken!
4. The earth connection has to be made before connecting the power cord!
Additional earth conductor:
Due to its high leakage current ( >3.5mA), the telecine unit must be connected
with an additional earth conductor of 6mm2. For more details see chapter
4.13.6 ”Required cross sections for the mains / earth cables”.
Make the earth connection with the additional earth conductor to the central PE
screw at the power terminal unit always before applying mains power!
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
8-3
8. First Setup
STE-B1
For this purpose, the line filter also carries the following warning note:
Caution !
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth connection essential
before connecting supply
16. Check the installation of the power cord
The-mains voltage has to be connected via a power cord to the line filter in the
power terminal unit (FH 4030 / FH 4032 / FH 4033) from the rear of the telecine
cabinet. For details refer to chapter 4.14 “Installation of the power cord”
8-4
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
8.2
8. First Setup
POWER ON
The telecine is switched on with the ”Power switch” at the right hand side of the
unit. To switch on the Graphical Control Panel GCP1 press the power button in the
upper left corner.
Note!
The boot up sequence takes about 2 minutes! Details, see the separate GCP
Customer’s Manual.
Warm-up
After 15 minutes operating time, all characteristics are stabilized.
To avoid EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problems keep the rear doors
always closed during operation!
STE -B1
Power switch
GCP
Diagnostics PC
Power switch
telecine
Fig. 804: Shadow Telecine and GCP
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
8-5
8. First Setup
STE-B1
After switching on, the power up test appears on the display of the Graphical
Control Panel GCP.
Ctrl
Press once the CONTROL BUTTON
to get control over the Shadow Telecine.
Next, the home menu appears on the display. It permits the user to handle the most
important machine settings and operation modes.
Fig. 805: Home Menu
8-6
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
8.3
8. First Setup
BASIC CHECK
For the basic check Graphical Control Panel is required!
For details see chapter 3.3 of the ”Operation Instructions”.
1. Select TV standard
Menu TK Config, SDTV or HDTV submenu
2. Check Lens Gate Assembly and Film Gate Block
Check wether the appropriate Lens Gate Assembly (16 mm / 35 mm) and Film
Gate Block match the film scanner to the respective film format.
3. Preparation filmdeck
Configuration possibilities concerning filmdeck are to be found in the menu TK
Config.
Set core diameter, Auto stop, max shuttle speed
4. Setup film
Menu Film, set film type
adapt the film scanner to the film to be played.
D Define film type
PRINT POS
for color or B/W positive film
PRINT NEG
for color or B/W positive film, inverted scanning
INTERM POS
for intermediate film positive
INTERM NEG
for intermediate film negative
PRIMETIME POS
for primetime neg film, non-inverted scanning
PRIMETIME NEG
for primetime negative film, inverted scanning
COLOR POS
for color negative film, non-inverted scanning
COLOR NEG
for color negative film, inverted scanning
5. Select Ratio 4:3 / 16 : 9
Menu TK Config, select SDTV ratio
6. Select speed
Menu TK Config, select Film speed or SAS speed
Select a fixed or a variable film speed.
7. Perform FPN correction
Local Control Panel, press both keys FPN together
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
8-7
8. First Setup
STE-B1
8. Thread the film
D Define winding direction
The two switches A / B on the filmdeck are to be set in position A.
D Mount film roll
or
Mount film reel
D Thread the film according to the film threading path, printed on the filmdeck.
D Take care to put the frame bar on the cross line of the sprocket wheel.
9. Adjust Frame Line
Menu Home, ”set frame”
or
Press key FRAMING on the Local Control Panel. This effects a coarse correction of the frame line downwards (1 perforation hole downwards per film picture).
10. Adjust optical focus
Menu Home, ”set focus”
11. Select scanning format (fixed aspect)
Menu Sizing, submenu Repro, select a fixed scan format by pressing “Fix Aspect”
12. Select fixed reproduction format (fixed repro)
Menu Sizing, submenu Repro, select fixed repro
13. Adjust Film Masking
Menu Film, submenu Masking
serves the color adaption to the actual film. Adaption is made optionally by
selection of fixed (unity) or variable masking coefficients.
14. Check intensity of film illumination
Menu Film, slide the control “CCD output” for 100% video level.
The brightness of one of the RGB signals should reach a level of 100%.
15. Check Video Basic Gain
Menu Film, set GAIN to 0 dB or 6 dB
With very dense film material, use basic gain 6 dB
16. Check white level and black level (Gain & Lift)
Menu Film
Film scene white:
Adjust Gain for the white adjustment
Adjust picture white in the RGB channels to 100% video signal.
Film scene black:
Adjust “Lift” for the black adjustment.
Adjust picture black in the RGB channels to 1% setup.
8-8
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
8. First Setup
17. Check black level (Black Master & Black RGB)
Note!
Adjustments of black Master and black RGB do not change the white level!
Menu Color,
Use film scene with picture black and stop
Menu Color
Black Master
RGB black level adjustment together;
for adjust, slide control Black on the touch
screen
Black RGB
magnitude and phase for R G B black level
adjustment.
slide directly on the colored hexagon of the
touchscreen or use the trackball
The adjustments are judged on the color monitor.
18. Check white level (White Master & White RGB)
Adjustments of White Master and White RGB do not change the black level!
Menu Color
Film scene with picture white
White Master
RGB white level adjustment together;
for adjust, slide the control White on the touch
screen
White RGB
magnitude and phase RGB white level adjust
individually or mixed
slide directly on the colored hexagon of the
touchscreen or use the the trackball
The adjustments are judged on the color monitor.
19. Check Gray level (Gamma Master & Gamma RGB)
Menu Color
Film scene with a medium gradation
Gamma Master
RGB gray level adjustment together
for adjust, slide the control Gamma on the
touch screen
Gamma RGB
magnitude and phase RGB gray level adjust
individually or mixed
slide directly on the colored hexagon of the
touchscreen or use the the trackball
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
8-9
8. First Setup
STE-B1
20. Check contour and coring
Menu Sharp
adjust contour
adjust coring
adjust for optimum H and V contour
adjust contour for optimum noise suppression
in black
21. Check audio channels (if audio option is available)
Menu Audio, submenu A Config,
Select Source
Off, Ext1&2, Opt or Mag, Test tone;
Select Pre–Adjust
Source pre-adjust not necessary
Select Dolby
None or Dolby SR
select lowpass
None or 5Khz filter
Synchronize digital audio channels
int. Video or 48 Khz
Select pre-emphasis
On or Off
Select Channel mode
Mono / Stereo
Adjust lip synchronous film sound
channel 1 & 2 delay
Check film audio path with test tone
1 or 10 Khz
22. Adjust audio level
Menu Audio, submenu A level
Adjust audio level
Adjust headphone volume
Adjust monitoring volume
Studio level –3dB, 0dB; 4dB; 8dB;
23. Adjust Sepmag channels
Menu Special
Submenu Extern D
Sepmag Coupling Source
Sepmag Coupling
Bi phase or Timecode
2 ppf or 10 ppf
24. Using of “Optical Effect Filters” , see chapter 3 “Operation Instructions”
8-10
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
8.4
8. First Setup
CONTROL OF THE REFERENCE SIGNAL
External reference signal connections on Terminal Panel FY 6319 / Rack 3
SYNC 1
SYNC 2
SYNC 3
SER REF
J 35
J 38
J 43
J 45
J 36
J 39
J 44
J 46
Fig. 806:
Sync 1
Loop input 1 for an analog studio reference,
SDTV: bilevel / HDTV: trilevel.
Sync 2
Loop input 2 for an analog studio reference.
SDTV: bilevel / HDTV: trilevel.
Sync 3
Loop input 3 for an analog studio reference.
SDTV: bilevel / HDTV: trilevel.
Ser Ref
Loop input 3 for an analog studio reference.
Select the connected reference signal in the ”Home menu, submenu Setup” , button Genlock “Ref Sync” as a reference source.
Fig. 807: Menu Setup, window Genlock Settings
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
8-11
8. First Setup
STE-B1
The following signals can be selected from the menu:
8-12
Internal
film scanner is synchronized internally (runs free)
EXT1
film scanner is synchronized by genlock signal EXT1
(EXT 1: Input EXT REF SYNC 1 on terminal Rack 3)
EXT 2
film scanner is synchronized by genlock signal EXT 2
(EXT 2: Input EXT REF SYNC 2 on terminal Rack 3)
EXT 3
film scanner is synchronized by genlock signal EXT 3
(EXT3: Input EXT REF SYNC 3 on terminal Rack 3)
Serial
film scanner is synchronized by serial signal ”SER REF”
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
9. Basic Operation
9.
BASIC OPERATION
9.1
CONDITIONS FOR BASIC OPERATION
STE -B1
PHILIPS
Local control panel
Fig. 901: Shadow Telecine
Front doors open
Film operation up to a fixed speed of
maximum 50 frames per second is possible.
Front doors closed
All operation modes are possible.
Front doors locked
With a certain shuttle speed (>2 times play)
closed front doors are locked additionally.
The front doors are unlocked as soon as
the shuttle speed (<2 times play) is reached
again.
Attention!
Opening the front doors effects that a high shuttle speed is reduced to
2 times play speed!
To avoid EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problems keep the rear doors
always closed during operation!
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
9-1
9. Basic Operation
STE-B1
Note:
Should it happen, that due to a technical disturbance, the electronic door
lock cannot be unlocked, it is possible to manually unlock the door lock, see
section 3 Servicing, chapter 3.17 in the Service Manual.
9.2
9.2.1
REPRODUCTION MODE (PLAY)
F1
F2
S8
S16
FRM Y
FPN I
Play
A
FPN I
FRM B
Step
A
Stand
by
Play
"
Shuttle
Stop
J
Step
"
Focus
Remote
PLAY
Play mode for playback at normal speed.
Playback in this mode is started by pressing key ”Play A” or ”Play "” on the control panel.
9.2.2
SHUTTLE
Select Shuttle playback if you want to reach a distant film position fast (also rewind).
The film speed is set with the multi function dial in the range of maximum +/–10
times normal speed (with 35mm). The dial latches in the central position (zero film
speed) and in the final position.
Shuttle playback is started by pressing key ”Shuttle”.
Note:
The maximum film speed is reduced near the end of the film.
In high-speed shuttle playback, the video picture can serve for orientation purposes.
9-2
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
9. Basic Operation
9-3
9. Basic Operation
9-4
STE-B1
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
10.
10. Index
INDEX
6–Sector Color Processor, –Specifications, 2-22
Color framing, 7-7
COMMAG, 2-15
A
Accessories, 1-12, 4-6
Basic, 1-12
Commissioning, 4-36
COMOPT, 2-15
Condensor lenses, 4-29, 4-31
Air filter, 4-27
Conformity, 1-2
CE, 1-2
UL, 1-2
Air pressure, 4-27
Connecting GCP, 4-24
Air quantity, 2-1
Connection cabel
–AATON, 5-13
–ARRI, 5-13
–EVERTZ, 5-12
Air compressor, 4-25
Analog video, 1-5
Aperture, 2-7
Audio, 2-13, 2-15
–analog, 1-8
–Delay, 2-16
–digital, 1-8
–format, 2-15
–formats, 1-8
–Inputs, 2-13, 2-15
–Monitoring, 2-14
–Outputs, 2-13, 2-15
–processing, 1-8
–Reference, 2-14
–SR/SRD, 2-13
Audio scanner, 1-18
B
Basic check, 8-7
Basic operation, 9-1
Batteries, V
Blanking, 2-9
C
Cable feed–through, 5-1, 5-2
CCD scanner, 2-6
CCD sensor, 1-3
CCIR, 2-16
CE, I
Connections, 5-1
–Rack 1, 5-5
–Audio in– and outputs, 5-6
–Audio reference, 5-8
–Internal, 5-9
–Rack 2, 5-11
–Color frame reference, 5-13
–Internal, 5-24
–Keycode in, 5-12
–Pulses out, 5-22
–RJ45/iMCS, 5-17
–Various out, 5-14
–Waveform monitoring, 5-20
–Rack 3, 5-27
–Analog video out, 5-28
–Data interface, 5-42
–Digital video out, 5-30
–Extern, control assy out, 5-41
–External reference inputs, 5-38
–iMCS, 5-40
–Internal, 5-43
–RS 232, 5-40
–Sync pulses outputs, 5-37
–Time code, 5-39
iMCS, 5-45
RJ45, 5-45
Contour Correction, 1-4
Contour correction, 2-7
Control, –system, 2-10
D
CFR signal, 7-7
Data format, 2-17
Cleaning, 4-29
Data I/O connector, 5-34
Color correction, 1-4, 2-8
Data output, 2-17
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
10-1
10. Index
Desk mounting, 4-15
Diagnostics, 1-12
Digital video, 1-5
DTV, output, 1-9
STE-B1
G
Gate blast unit, 2-6
Gateblast, 1-4, 4-25
Graphical control panel, 4-15
Grey scale disc, 2-6
E
Ground load, 4-3
Grounding, 4-38
Editor interface, 5-15
Effect filter, 8-10
Effect filter kit, 2-9
Effect filters, 1-3, 4-33
Electromagnetic compatibility, 2-2
H
Halogen lamp, 2-6, 4-31
Handles, 4-13
Environmental, 2-1
HDTV, 2-19
output, 1-9
Environmental conditions, 4-7
HDTV output, 1-18
Extern reference, 2-13
Heat absorbing filter, 4-31
Extern aux, 5-16
HIPPI, 2-17, 2-18
Home menu, 8-6
F
FCC Rules, II
Features, 1-3
Hub, 5-45
I
I/O Interfaces, 2-12
Film
–capacity, 2-5
–gate, 2-6
–scanning, 2-6
–speed Data Out, 2-17
–Speeds, 2-19
–speeds, 2-4
–transport, 2-4
–types, 2-4
Illumination, 2-6
Film , –size formats, 2-4
Interfaces, 7-1
–CFR, 7-6
–color framing, 2-12
–Data output, 7-9
–Extern aux, 2-12
–HIPPI, 7-10
–LTC out, 2-12
–SEPMAG, 2-12
–SOF, 7-6
–Waveform monitoring, 7-4
Film formats, 1-3
Film reels, 1-4
Film transport, 1-4
Film types, 1-3
Filmdeck, 1-17
Filter wheel, 4-30
Image Size, 2-17
iMCS, 1-6, 2-12, 7-2, 7-3
Infrared filter, 4-31
Installation, 4-1
Installation check, 8-1
Instructions forwarding agencies, 4-3
Filters, 4-29
First Setup, 8-1
FPN, 1-5
Framing, 2-5
Fuses, III, 4-36, 4-52, 4-55
10-2
K
Keycode, - Reader, 1-5
Keycode Applications
–AATON, 3-21
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
STE-B1
–ARRI, 3-23
Keycode applications, –EVERTZ, 3-19
10. Index
Power supply, 4-36
Power terminal, 1-15
Power up test, 8-6
L
Pressure reducer, 4-27
Projection lamp, 4-29
Lamp house, 4-29
Protective earth, 4-38
Lens gate assembly, 4-33
PTR Rollers, 1-6, 1-18
LGA, 1-3, 1-7, 1-17, 2-6, 4-33
Local control panel, 1-5, 1-18, 4-12
R
Rack 1, 1-17, 4-56, 4-57, 5-5, 6-1
M
Rack 2, 1-17, 4-56, 4-59, 5-11, 6-9
Rack 3, 1-18, 4-56, 4-59, 5-27, 6-21
Mains cables, 4-47
Rack mounting, 4-21
Mains connection, 4-35
Reference signal, 8-11
Mains supply, 2-3
Relative humidity, 2-1
Mains systems, 4-41
Remote control, 1-6
Mains terminal, 4-48
Remote systems, 7-3
Mains voltage, 4-36
Reproduction (play), 9-2
Masking, 2-8
Resolution, 2-19
Mechanical dimension, 2-3, 4-7
Rotation, 1-8, 2-19
RS 422 interface, 5-18
N
Noise Emission, 2-2
Run–up time, 2-5
S
Safety instructions, I, 4-2, 4-35
O
Safety regulations, 2-1
SAS, 1-5
Operation, 9-1
SDCMAINT, 1-12
Operation temperature, 2-1, 4-8
SEPMAG, 1-5, 5-15
Operational controls, 6-1
Setting upright, 4-3
Options, 1-18, 2-15
Shadow Telecine, 1-1
Overview, 1-17
Shuttle mode, 9-2
Signal/Noise, 2-8, 2-19
P
Sizing, 1-4
Special characteristics, 1-3
Particle transfer rollers, 1-6
Specifications, 2-1
Peak area load, 4-5
Standards, 1-3
Picture stability, 2-5
Stop mode, 2-4
Play mode, 9-2
System applications, 3-1
Power consumption, 2-3
Power cord, 4-47, 4-48
Power on, 8-5
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002
T
Technical data, 2-1
10-3
10. Index
Terminal Panel EMC, 5-1
Test films, 1-14
Thermal switch, 4-9
STE-B1
–HDTV, 2-19
–out HDTV, 2-19
–outputs, 2-13
–specifications, 2-8
–TV standards, 2-8, 2-19
Time code, 1-5, 5-14
- system, 1-5
Visible search, 2-4
Transport protection, 4-11
Vistavision, 2-21
Tri level sync, 5-38
Type label, 4-36
U
W
Waveform monitoring, 1-6, 2-11, 2-14, 3-17
Waveform monitors, 2-11
UL, I
Unpacking, 4-3
Weight, 2-3, 4-2
Winding plates, 1-4
V
Ventilation, 2-1, 4-9, 4-37
Video
–External reference HDTV, 2-19
10-4
Z
Zoom, 2-19
Planning and Installation – Rev. 2 / 04.2002